1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Index idx
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
504 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 \begin_layout Chapter
516 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
520 \begin_layout Section
521 Basic File Operations
522 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
534 \begin_layout Standard
539 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
540 in addition to some more advanced operations:
543 \begin_layout Itemize
565 \begin_layout Itemize
581 arg "buffer-new-template"
587 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "buffer-write-as"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Standard
702 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
703 a few minor differences.
706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
717 command lists the available templates.
718 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
719 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
720 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
728 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
735 \begin_layout Standard
736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
769 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
770 is just that — a big, blank space.
778 \begin_layout Standard
799 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
804 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
807 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
825 will reload the document from disk.
826 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
827 and want to restore it to the last save.
836 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
837 them as your changes.
840 \begin_layout Section
841 Basic Editing Features
842 \begin_inset Index idx
845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
854 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
861 \begin_layout Standard
862 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
863 can perform cut and paste operations
864 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
865 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
866 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
867 editing features and how to access
869 We will start with cut and paste.
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 As you might expect, the
877 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
878 various other editing features.
879 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
883 \begin_layout Itemize
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
921 \begin_layout Itemize
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 \begin_layout Itemize
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \begin_inset Index idx
1042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 The first three are self-explanatory.
1075 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1076 and other programs by
1097 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1098 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1103 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1104 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1105 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1106 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1107 into individual cells.
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1116 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1117 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset space ~
1130 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1132 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1148 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1149 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1155 \begin_inset space \space{}
1158 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1159 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1162 \begin_inset space ~
1165 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1184 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1185 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1187 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1191 \begin_inset space ~
1196 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1197 start a new paragraph.
1198 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1199 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1204 \begin_inset space ~
1207 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1224 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 paste from the primary selection.
1228 This is normally the currently selected text.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1258 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1264 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 button to skip the current word.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1301 If the toggle is set, searching for
1302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1313 will not match the word
1314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 Match whole words only
1330 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1331 to only find complete words, e.
1332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 offers also an advanced
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 feature that is described in section
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1380 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1387 \begin_layout Standard
1388 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1403 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1408 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1419 arg "inset-select-all"
1422 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1423 When the cursor is inside an inset
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 selects the content of the inset.
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1441 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1444 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1448 \begin_layout Section
1450 \begin_inset Index idx
1453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1472 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1482 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1488 or the toolbar button
1494 to undo some mistake.
1495 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 or the toolbar button
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1514 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1518 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1521 \begin_layout Standard
1522 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1532 This is a consequence of the 100
1533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1536 step undo limit mentioned above.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1548 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1550 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1554 \begin_layout Section
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1572 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 \begin_layout Itemize
1582 once anywhere in the edit window.
1583 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1587 \begin_layout Enumerate
1592 \begin_layout Itemize
1599 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1605 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1606 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1621 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1626 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1627 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1631 \begin_layout Section
1633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1635 name "sec:Navigating"
1640 \begin_inset Index idx
1643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1727 \begin_layout Subsection
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1740 Navigating ! Outline
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1760 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1761 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1763 \begin_inset space ~
1767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1773 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1774 \begin_inset space ~
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1785 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1791 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1792 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1793 dialog and to modify the citation.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1801 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1802 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1804 Labels and References
1806 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1815 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1818 \begin_layout Standard
1819 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1820 you further to control the display.
1825 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1826 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1832 option keeps it in the current view state.
1833 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1834 \begin_inset space ~
1837 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1838 \begin_inset space ~
1841 3, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1850 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1855 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1865 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1868 \begin_layout Standard
1875 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1876 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1890 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1891 So, for example, you can move section
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1896 \begin_inset space ~
1899 2.4 or after section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1905 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1918 (or the corresponding key bindings
1926 ) you can change the level of sections.
1927 So you can for example make section
1928 \begin_inset space ~
1932 \begin_inset space ~
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \begin_layout Standard
1943 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1944 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1947 \begin_layout Subsection
1948 Horizontal Scrolling
1949 \begin_inset Index idx
1952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1953 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1961 \begin_layout Standard
1963 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1969 \begin_inset space \space{}
1973 \begin_inset space ~
1976 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1977 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1978 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1982 \begin_layout Standard
1983 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1987 \begin_layout Itemize
1989 is used on a small tablet computer
1992 \begin_layout Itemize
1993 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2005 \begin_inset space ~
2018 \begin_layout Itemize
2019 Math constructs with long command names
2022 \begin_layout Standard
2023 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2024 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2026 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2027 windows so that table
2028 \begin_inset space ~
2032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2034 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2039 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2041 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2042 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2045 \begin_layout Standard
2046 \begin_inset Float table
2052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2053 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2058 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2062 Horizontal scrolling test.
2070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2072 \begin_inset Tabular
2073 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2074 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2077 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2119 \begin_layout Section
2120 Input/Word Completion
2121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2123 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2138 \begin_inset Index idx
2141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2172 \begin_layout Standard
2174 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2176 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2177 is used to propose completions.
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2181 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2184 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2189 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 \begin_inset space ~
2200 \begin_inset space ~
2205 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2209 \begin_inset space ~
2214 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2215 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2219 \begin_inset space ~
2225 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2226 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2227 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2228 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2231 \begin_layout Standard
2233 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2234 completions available.
2239 key to accept a proposed completion.
2240 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2241 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2242 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2249 \begin_layout Standard
2250 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2251 ing options for text.
2252 The special math option
2256 enables characters to be composed.
2257 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2258 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2261 , you can then input the characters
2262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2273 to a formula to get it.
2274 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2275 of the math toolbar.
2276 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2280 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2281 's installation folder.
2282 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2291 \begin_layout Section
2293 \begin_inset Index idx
2296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2303 \begin_inset Index idx
2306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2335 \begin_inset Index idx
2338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2369 \begin_layout Standard
2370 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2384 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2387 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2391 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2392 \begin_inset space ~
2396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2398 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2405 \begin_layout Standard
2409 \begin_inset space ~
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2438 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2442 \begin_layout Labeling
2443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2447 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2448 LatexCommand nomenclature
2450 description "Tabulator key"
2456 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2458 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2459 \begin_inset space ~
2463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2465 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2472 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2476 , especially section
2477 \begin_inset space ~
2481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2483 reference "subsec:Lists"
2489 If you are still confused, look in the
2494 \begin_inset Newline newline
2502 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2503 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2507 \begin_layout Labeling
2508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2512 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2513 LatexCommand nomenclature
2515 description "Escape key"
2522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2529 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2530 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2533 \begin_layout Labeling
2534 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2540 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2551 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2552 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2556 \begin_layout Standard
2557 There are three modifier keys:
2560 \begin_layout Labeling
2561 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2579 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2580 LatexCommand nomenclature
2582 description "Control key"
2586 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2587 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2591 \begin_layout Itemize
2600 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2615 \begin_layout Itemize
2624 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2628 \begin_layout Labeling
2629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2647 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2648 LatexCommand nomenclature
2650 description "Shift key"
2654 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2655 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2658 \begin_layout Labeling
2659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2677 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2678 LatexCommand nomenclature
2680 description "Alt or Meta key"
2684 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2685 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2686 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2692 \begin_inset Newline newline
2695 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2697 menu accelerator keys
2700 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2701 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2705 \begin_layout Standard
2706 For example, the sequence
2707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2713 \begin_inset space ~
2717 \begin_inset space ~
2723 \begin_inset space ~
2731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2750 \begin_inset space ~
2756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2766 \begin_layout Standard
2771 manual lists all other things bound to the
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2780 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2782 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2783 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2784 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2785 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2786 The \SpecialChar LyX
2787 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2788 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2789 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2791 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2807 followed by a capital
2814 \begin_layout Chapter
2817 \begin_inset Index idx
2820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2830 \begin_layout Section
2832 \begin_inset Index idx
2835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2844 \begin_layout Subsection
2848 \begin_layout Standard
2849 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2850 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2851 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2852 numbering schemes, and so on.
2853 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2854 and format the title of your document differently.
2857 \begin_layout Standard
2862 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2863 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2864 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2865 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2866 picks one for you by default.
2867 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2870 \begin_layout Subsection
2872 \begin_inset Index idx
2875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2884 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2891 \begin_layout Standard
2892 You can select a class using the
2894 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2895 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2899 \begin_inset Index idx
2902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2909 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2917 \begin_layout Standard
2918 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 Article for basic articles
2927 \begin_layout Description
2928 Report for basic reports
2931 \begin_layout Description
2932 Book for writing a book
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Letter for US-style letters
2939 \begin_layout Standard
2940 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2941 only uses if you have installed
2942 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2943 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2944 distributions will include
2946 Here are some of the classes.
2947 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2949 Special Document Classes
2958 \begin_layout Description
2959 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2962 \begin_layout Description
2963 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2967 \begin_layout Description
2968 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2972 \begin_layout Description
2973 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2974 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2975 There are three article layouts available.
2976 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2977 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2978 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2979 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2984 sequential numbering
2985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2988 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2989 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2990 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2991 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2994 \begin_layout Description
2995 Beamer Layout for presentations
2998 \begin_layout Description
2999 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3000 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3001 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3002 with \SpecialChar LyX
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3010 \begin_layout Description
3012 \begin_inset space ~
3015 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3022 \begin_layout Description
3023 Foils Used to make transparencies
3026 \begin_layout Description
3027 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3028 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3029 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3030 with \SpecialChar LyX
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3036 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3043 \begin_layout Description
3044 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3049 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3050 (Is used by this document.)
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3057 \begin_layout Description
3058 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3061 \begin_layout Description
3066 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3067 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3069 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3073 \begin_layout Description
3074 Slides Used to make transparencies
3077 \begin_layout Description
3079 \begin_inset space ~
3082 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3083 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3090 \begin_layout Standard
3091 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3093 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3095 Special Document Classes
3102 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3103 of the document classes.
3106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3110 \begin_layout Standard
3111 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3114 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3116 \begin_inset Index idx
3119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3136 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3137 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3139 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3142 \begin_layout Standard
3145 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3150 , are highly specialized.
3152 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3153 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3154 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3155 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3156 by some document class.
3157 There are just too many of them.
3158 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3161 \begin_layout Standard
3162 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3170 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3171 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3172 document class for a new file.
3174 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3177 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 manual for information on how to install them.
3185 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3191 \begin_layout Standard
3192 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3193 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3194 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3195 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 class files to be used for dissertation
3197 s submitted to those universities.
3198 The \SpecialChar LyX
3199 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3201 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3205 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3211 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3218 name "subsec:Modules"
3223 \begin_inset Index idx
3226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3236 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3237 chosen document class.
3238 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3239 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3246 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3250 \begin_inset Index idx
3253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3260 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3264 \begin_layout Standard
3265 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3266 packages or file format converters that are not always
3267 installed by default.
3269 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3270 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3271 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3272 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3274 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3275 file without the missing prerequisites.
3276 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3277 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3280 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3284 \begin_inset Index idx
3287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3288 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3294 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3299 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3302 \begin_layout Standard
3303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3311 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3313 will advise you about these things.
3321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3325 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3330 \begin_inset Index idx
3333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3334 Document ! Local Layout
3342 \begin_layout Standard
3343 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3344 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3345 : They are intended to be used in
3346 a variety of different documents.
3347 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3348 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3349 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3350 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3351 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3353 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3371 manual for information on how to use it.
3374 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3378 \begin_layout Standard
3379 Each class has a default set of options.
3380 Here's a quick table describing them:
3383 \begin_layout Standard
3384 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3392 \begin_inset Tabular
3393 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3394 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3397 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3398 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3399 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3853 \begin_layout Standard
3854 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3860 \begin_layout Standard
3861 You're probably also wondering what
3862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3866 \begin_inset space ~
3870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3874 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3875 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3880 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3885 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3895 headings, there are also
3903 headings, and so on.
3904 We will describe these headings fully in section
3905 \begin_inset space ~
3909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3911 reference "subsec:Headings"
3918 \begin_layout Subsection
3920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3922 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3927 \begin_inset Index idx
3930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 \begin_inset Index idx
3940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_layout Standard
3950 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3959 \begin_inset space ~
3967 \begin_inset space ~
3972 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3974 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3975 doesn't support special options you want to
3976 use for your document.
3977 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3978 -class and its options, you have to read
3982 \begin_layout Standard
3986 \begin_inset space ~
3993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4004 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4005 You can choose between the following five options:
4008 \begin_layout Labeling
4009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4014 Use default page style of current class.
4017 \begin_layout Labeling
4018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4023 No page numbers or headings.
4026 \begin_layout Labeling
4027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 \begin_layout Labeling
4036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4041 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4042 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4043 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4044 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4054 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4060 \begin_inset Index idx
4063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4065 -packages ! fancyhdr
4071 How they are defined is explained in section
4072 \begin_inset space ~
4076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4078 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4085 \begin_layout Standard
4086 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4087 \begin_inset space ~
4091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4093 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4100 \begin_layout Subsection
4101 Paper Size and Orientation
4102 \begin_inset Index idx
4105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4106 Document ! Paper size
4112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4114 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4121 \begin_layout Standard
4122 You can find the following options in the menu
4125 \begin_inset space ~
4132 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4136 \begin_inset Index idx
4139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4148 \begin_layout Labeling
4149 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4153 \begin_inset space ~
4158 What size paper to print on.
4163 \begin_layout Itemize
4169 \begin_layout Itemize
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4190 US letter, US legal, US executive
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4206 \begin_layout Labeling
4207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4212 To choose whether to output as
4223 \begin_layout Labeling
4224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4228 \begin_inset space ~
4233 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4234 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4237 \begin_layout Subsection
4239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4241 name "subsec:Margins"
4246 \begin_inset Index idx
4249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4256 \begin_inset Index idx
4259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_layout Standard
4269 Paper margins are set in the menu
4271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4275 \begin_inset Index idx
4278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4287 \begin_layout Standard
4288 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4289 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4290 the paper format and the font size into account.
4293 \begin_layout Subsection
4297 \begin_layout Standard
4298 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4304 That includes the paragraph environments.
4305 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4306 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4307 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4309 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4318 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4320 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4321 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4322 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4325 \begin_layout Section
4326 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4327 \begin_inset Index idx
4330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4331 Paragraph ! Indentation
4339 \begin_layout Subsection
4341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4343 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4350 \begin_layout Standard
4351 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4352 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4355 \begin_layout Standard
4356 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4357 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4358 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4359 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4363 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4369 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4370 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4371 language than English.
4373 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4376 \begin_layout Standard
4377 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4378 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4379 into \SpecialChar LyX
4381 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4384 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4386 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4387 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4388 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4396 goes to produce a printable file.
4401 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4403 gives you the ability globally to change
4407 these pre-coded spacings.
4408 We will explain more later.
4411 \begin_layout Subsection
4412 Paragraph Separation
4413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4415 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4420 \begin_inset Index idx
4423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4424 Paragraph ! Separation
4432 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset space ~
4448 \begin_inset space ~
4455 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4459 \begin_inset Index idx
4462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4468 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4471 \begin_layout Subsection
4475 \begin_layout Standard
4476 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4479 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4481 \begin_inset space ~
4486 dialog and toggle the
4489 \begin_inset space ~
4494 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4497 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4501 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4502 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4506 \begin_layout Standard
4507 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4508 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4511 \begin_layout Subsection
4513 \begin_inset Index idx
4516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4517 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4528 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4532 \begin_inset Index idx
4535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4544 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4548 \begin_inset space ~
4557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4564 \begin_inset Index idx
4567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4569 -packages ! setspace
4574 installed to use this feature.
4579 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4581 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4583 \begin_inset space ~
4588 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4589 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4592 \begin_layout Section
4593 Paragraph Environments
4594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4596 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4601 \begin_inset Index idx
4604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4605 Paragraph ! Environments
4611 \begin_inset Index idx
4614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4615 Paragraph environments|(
4623 \begin_layout Subsection
4627 \begin_layout Standard
4628 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4631 \begin_layout Standard
4640 } \SpecialChar ldots
4650 \begin_inset Newline newline
4653 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4655 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4656 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4657 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4666 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4669 \begin_layout Standard
4670 A paragraph environment is simply a
4671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4678 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4679 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4680 scheme, labels, and so on.
4681 Additionally, you can
4682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4689 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4690 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4691 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4692 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4694 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4696 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4699 \begin_layout Standard
4700 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4701 \begin_inset Graphics
4702 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4708 at the left end of the toolbar.
4710 will change the environment of the
4714 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4715 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4716 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4720 \begin_layout Standard
4729 create a new paragraph using the
4733 paragraph environment.
4735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4742 because if you are in one of these environments:
4745 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Standard
4789 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4793 , rather than resetting it to
4798 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4799 \begin_inset space ~
4803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4805 reference "sec:Nesting"
4812 \begin_layout Subsection
4816 \begin_layout Standard
4817 The default paragraph environment is
4822 It creates a plain paragraph.
4824 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4825 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4826 this manual) are in the
4833 \begin_layout Standard
4834 You can nest a paragraph using the
4838 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4846 \begin_layout Subsection
4848 \begin_inset Index idx
4851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4860 \begin_layout Standard
4861 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4862 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4871 for thanks or contact information.
4872 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4873 places all of this on a separate page
4874 along with today's date.
4875 For other types of documents, the title
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4887 \begin_layout Standard
4889 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4903 Here's how you use them:
4906 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 Put the title of your document in the
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4915 Put the author name in the
4922 \begin_layout Itemize
4923 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4924 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4930 Note that using this environment is optional.
4931 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4932 will automatically insert today's date.
4933 If you don't want a date, use the option
4935 Suppress default date on front page
4939 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4940 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4942 \begin_inset space ~
4950 \begin_layout Standard
4951 You can use footnotes to insert
4952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4959 or contact information.
4962 \begin_layout Subsection
4964 \begin_inset Index idx
4967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4976 name "subsec:Headings"
4983 \begin_layout Standard
4984 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4986 takes care of the numbering for you.
4989 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4991 \begin_inset Index idx
4994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4995 Section headings ! Numbered
5003 \begin_layout Standard
5004 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5008 \begin_layout Enumerate
5014 \begin_layout Enumerate
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Standard
5052 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5053 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5054 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5057 \begin_layout Standard
5058 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5059 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5060 You group the book into chapters.
5062 does a similar grouping:
5065 \begin_layout Itemize
5070 is divided into either
5081 \begin_layout Itemize
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Standard
5142 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5150 Not all document types use the
5154 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5159 is the top-level heading.
5167 \begin_layout Standard
5172 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5173 labels it with its number,
5174 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5176 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5190 \begin_inset Index idx
5193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5194 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5202 \begin_layout Standard
5203 The unnumbered section headings have a
5204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5211 at the end of their name.
5212 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5213 the table of contents, see section
5214 \begin_inset space ~
5218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5228 Changing the Numbering
5229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5231 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5238 \begin_layout Standard
5239 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5240 in the Table of Contents.
5241 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5243 Just as certain classes start with
5257 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5267 This is something you can change.
5270 \begin_layout Standard
5273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5277 \begin_inset Index idx
5280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5289 \begin_inset space ~
5293 \begin_inset space ~
5298 you will see two counters.
5303 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5304 numbers a section heading.
5305 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5310 Short Titles of Headings
5311 \begin_inset Index idx
5314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5315 Section headings ! Short titles
5321 \begin_inset Argument 1
5324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5333 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5340 \begin_layout Standard
5341 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5342 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5343 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5344 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5347 \begin_layout Standard
5349 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5350 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5351 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5352 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5355 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5357 \begin_inset space ~
5363 This will insert a box labeled
5364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5368 \begin_inset space ~
5372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5375 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5376 This also works for captions inside floats.
5377 There can only be one short title per title.
5380 \begin_layout Standard
5381 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5388 \begin_layout Standard
5389 The following information applies to all section headings:
5392 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5396 \begin_layout Itemize
5397 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5400 \begin_layout Itemize
5401 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5408 \begin_layout Subsection
5412 \begin_layout Standard
5414 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5428 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5429 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5430 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5431 the text they contain.
5432 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5440 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5443 \begin_layout Standard
5444 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5453 when you start a new paragraph.
5454 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5458 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5459 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5460 have to change back to the
5464 environment yourself.
5467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5476 \begin_inset Index idx
5479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5488 \begin_layout Standard
5489 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5490 time for the differences.
5499 are identical except for one difference:
5503 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5512 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5515 \begin_layout Standard
5516 Here's an example of the
5529 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5531 See – no indentation!
5535 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5536 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5537 the other paragraph.
5540 \begin_layout Standard
5541 Here's another example, this time in the
5548 \begin_layout Quotation
5554 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5555 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5556 the first line, then
5560 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5564 you were quoting other text.
5567 \begin_layout Quotation
5568 Here's a new paragraph.
5569 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5570 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5573 \begin_layout Standard
5574 As the examples show,
5578 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5579 They should put quotes in the
5584 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5588 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5593 \begin_inset Index idx
5596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5603 \begin_inset Index idx
5606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5622 \begin_layout Standard
5627 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5633 \begin_inset Newline newline
5636 Which I did not rehearse!
5640 It could be much worse.
5641 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5643 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5644 indented a bit more than the first.
5645 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5651 \begin_inset Newline newline
5654 And make things look fine
5655 \begin_inset Newline newline
5661 arg "newline-insert newline"
5667 \begin_layout Standard
5672 does not indent both margins.
5673 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5674 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5677 arg "newline-insert newline"
5683 \begin_layout Subsection
5685 \begin_inset Index idx
5688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5704 \begin_layout Standard
5706 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5716 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5717 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5726 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5727 lets you provide your own label.
5728 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5729 describing some general features of all four of them.
5732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5736 \begin_layout Standard
5737 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5739 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5749 reset the environment to
5753 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5754 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5755 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5759 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5763 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5770 \begin_layout Standard
5771 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5772 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5773 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5775 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5776 you read all of section
5777 \begin_inset space ~
5781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5783 reference "sec:Nesting"
5790 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5792 \begin_inset Index idx
5795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5811 \begin_layout Standard
5812 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5816 paragraph environment.
5817 It has the following properties:
5820 \begin_layout Itemize
5821 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5825 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5830 \begin_layout Itemize
5831 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5836 The items can have any length.
5838 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5839 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5846 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 environment inside another
5855 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5860 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5863 \begin_layout Itemize
5865 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5868 \begin_layout Itemize
5870 \begin_inset space ~
5874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5876 reference "sec:Nesting"
5880 for a full explanation of nesting.
5884 \begin_layout Standard
5885 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5894 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5899 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5902 \begin_layout Itemize
5903 The label for the first level
5907 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5911 \begin_layout Itemize
5912 The label for the second level is a dash.
5916 \begin_layout Itemize
5917 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5921 \begin_layout Itemize
5922 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5926 \begin_layout Itemize
5927 Back out to the third level.
5931 \begin_layout Itemize
5932 Back to the second level.
5936 \begin_layout Itemize
5937 Back to the outermost level.
5940 \begin_layout Standard
5941 These are the default labels for an
5946 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5951 dialog in the submenu
5956 \begin_inset Index idx
5959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5965 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5969 \begin_layout Standard
5970 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5971 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5973 \begin_inset space ~
5977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5979 reference "sec:Nesting"
5986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5988 \begin_inset Index idx
5991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6000 name "sec:Enumerate"
6007 \begin_layout Standard
6012 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6013 It has these properties:
6016 \begin_layout Enumerate
6017 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6021 \begin_layout Enumerate
6022 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6026 \begin_layout Enumerate
6028 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6031 \begin_layout Enumerate
6036 environment resets the counter to one.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6053 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6054 Items can have any length.
6057 \begin_layout Enumerate
6058 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6061 \begin_layout Enumerate
6062 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6070 \begin_layout Standard
6079 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6081 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6082 labels the four different levels in an
6089 \begin_layout Enumerate
6090 The first level of an
6094 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6098 \begin_layout Enumerate
6099 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6103 \begin_layout Enumerate
6104 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6108 \begin_layout Enumerate
6109 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6112 \begin_layout Enumerate
6113 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6118 \begin_layout Enumerate
6119 Back to the third level
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 Back to the second level.
6128 \begin_layout Enumerate
6129 Back to the outermost level.
6132 \begin_layout Standard
6133 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6137 environment, see section
6138 \begin_inset space ~
6142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6144 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6149 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6153 \begin_layout Standard
6154 There is more to nesting
6158 environments than we've stated here.
6159 You should read section
6160 \begin_inset space ~
6164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6166 reference "sec:Nesting"
6170 to learn more about nesting.
6173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6175 \begin_inset Index idx
6178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6187 \begin_layout Standard
6188 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6192 list has no fixed label.
6193 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6202 of the first line as the label.
6206 \begin_layout Description
6207 Example: This is an example of the
6214 \begin_layout Standard
6216 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6220 \begin_layout Standard
6222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6229 it is meant that the first usage of the
6233 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6235 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6243 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6249 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6251 \begin_inset space ~
6257 \begin_inset space ~
6261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6263 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6267 for more information.) Here is an example:
6270 \begin_layout Description
6272 \begin_inset space ~
6275 Example: This one shows how to use a
6278 \begin_inset space ~
6290 \begin_layout Description
6291 Usage: You should use the
6295 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6296 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6298 It's not a good idea to use a
6302 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6303 You're better off using
6315 paragraphs into them.
6318 \begin_layout Description
6319 Nesting: You can nest
6323 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6327 \begin_layout Standard
6328 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6329 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6330 them from the first line.
6333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6335 \begin_inset Index idx
6338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6347 \begin_layout Standard
6352 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6353 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6357 \begin_layout Standard
6366 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6368 Here are its properties:
6371 \begin_layout Labeling
6372 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6374 \begin_inset space ~
6377 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6386 of each line as the item label.
6391 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6392 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6393 space as described above.
6396 \begin_layout Labeling
6397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6398 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6399 uses different margins for the item label and the
6400 body of the item text.
6401 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6402 label width plus a little extra space.
6406 \begin_layout Labeling
6407 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6409 \begin_inset space ~
6412 width \SpecialChar LyX
6413 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6414 If the label width is larger, the label
6415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6422 into the first line.
6423 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6424 margin of the rest of the item text.
6427 \begin_layout Labeling
6428 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6430 \begin_inset space ~
6433 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6438 environment has the same left margin.
6439 \begin_inset Newline newline
6442 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6445 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6447 \begin_inset space ~
6452 dialog (toolbar button
6455 arg "layout-paragraph"
6462 \begin_inset space ~
6467 determines the default label width.
6468 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6477 multiple times instead.
6478 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6488 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6491 \begin_inset space ~
6496 every time you alter a label in a
6501 \begin_inset Newline newline
6504 The predefined default width is the length of
6505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6513 \begin_inset space ~
6519 \begin_layout Standard
6524 list the same way as the
6528 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6534 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6538 \begin_layout Standard
6543 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6544 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6546 \begin_inset space ~
6550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6552 reference "sec:Nesting"
6556 to learn about nesting.
6559 \begin_layout Standard
6560 There is yet another feature of the
6564 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6565 left-justifies the item labels by
6567 You can use additional
6571 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6572 justifies the item label.
6577 are documented in section
6578 \begin_inset space ~
6582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6584 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6589 Here are some examples:
6592 \begin_layout Labeling
6593 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6594 Left The default for
6601 \begin_layout Labeling
6602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6610 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6619 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6626 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6629 \begin_layout Subsection
6631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6633 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6638 \begin_inset Index idx
6641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6650 \begin_layout Standard
6651 The features described in this section require that the module
6653 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6655 is loaded in the document settings.
6656 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6662 \begin_inset Index idx
6665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6667 -packages ! enumitem
6675 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6676 Custom Enumerate Lists
6677 \begin_inset Index idx
6680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6681 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6689 \begin_layout Standard
6691 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6697 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6698 There you add the command
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6709 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6722 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6723 Code, look at section
6724 \begin_inset space ~
6728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6730 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6743 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6750 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6751 For capital Roman numerals replace
6763 in the command above.
6764 For Arabic numerals use
6772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6779 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6794 \begin_layout Standard
6796 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6804 You can only number 26
6805 \begin_inset space ~
6808 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6816 \begin_layout Standard
6817 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6818 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6821 \begin_layout Standard
6822 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6825 \begin_layout Enumerate
6826 \begin_inset Argument 1
6829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6855 \begin_layout Enumerate
6856 \begin_inset Argument 1
6859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6882 \begin_layout Enumerate
6887 \begin_layout Enumerate
6888 \begin_inset Argument 1
6891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6915 \begin_layout Enumerate
6916 \begin_inset Argument 1
6919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6945 \begin_layout Standard
6946 For this list these commands were used:
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6960 \begin_inset Newline newline
6968 \begin_inset Newline newline
6976 \begin_inset Newline newline
6986 \begin_layout Standard
6993 makes the label emphasized and
7002 \begin_layout Standard
7003 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7011 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7012 lists until you change the definition.
7020 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7022 \begin_inset Index idx
7025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7026 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7034 \begin_layout Standard
7035 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7038 \begin_layout Enumerate
7039 \begin_inset Argument 1
7042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 \begin_inset Note Note
7064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 goes back to default numbering
7073 \begin_layout Enumerate
7077 \begin_layout Standard
7081 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7085 \begin_layout Standard
7086 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7091 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7092 to indicate that it is a resumed
7093 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7094 , but in the output.
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7106 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7115 \begin_layout Standard
7116 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7118 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7119 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7120 of a normal enumeration.
7121 There, insert the command
7124 \begin_layout Standard
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7135 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7139 \begin_layout Enumerate
7143 \begin_layout Enumerate
7147 \begin_layout Standard
7148 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7152 \begin_inset Argument 1
7155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 This enumeration starts at 4
7174 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7176 \begin_inset Index idx
7179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7188 \begin_layout Standard
7189 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7191 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7194 \begin_layout Itemize
7198 \begin_layout Itemize
7199 with standard spacing
7202 \begin_layout Standard
7203 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7205 Add there the command
7209 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7212 \begin_layout Itemize
7213 \begin_inset Argument 1
7216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7235 \begin_layout Itemize
7239 \begin_layout Itemize
7243 \begin_layout Standard
7244 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7251 \begin_inset Index idx
7254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7256 -packages ! enumitem
7262 For more information see its documentation,
7263 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7273 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7275 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7276 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7280 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7283 \begin_layout Enumerate
7284 \begin_inset Argument 1
7287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7295 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7308 \begin_layout Enumerate
7309 with negative indentation
7312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7313 Further Customization
7314 \begin_inset Index idx
7317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7318 Lists ! Customization
7326 \begin_layout Standard
7327 You can also change the style of description lists.
7331 \begin_layout Standard
7337 \begin_layout Standard
7338 changes the description label font, the command
7341 \begin_layout Standard
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 sets the list style.
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 An example where the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7360 itshape, style=nextline
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7367 \begin_layout Description
7369 \begin_inset space ~
7373 \begin_inset Argument 1
7376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7382 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7384 itshape, style=nextline
7394 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7395 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7399 \begin_layout Description
7401 \begin_inset space ~
7404 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7405 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7406 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7409 \begin_layout Standard
7410 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7416 \begin_inset Index idx
7419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7421 -packages ! enumitem
7427 For more information see its documentation
7428 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7437 \begin_layout Subsection
7439 \begin_inset Index idx
7442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7451 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7456 Address: An Overview
7459 \begin_layout Standard
7460 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7461 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7469 \begin_inset space ~
7475 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7476 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7477 gags on the document.
7478 In contrast, you can use the
7485 \begin_inset space ~
7490 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7491 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7495 \begin_layout Standard
7496 Of course, you're not limited to using
7503 \begin_inset space ~
7512 \begin_inset space ~
7517 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7518 some European academic papers.
7521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7525 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7532 \begin_layout Standard
7537 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7538 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7542 \begin_inset space ~
7547 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7548 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7549 Here's an example of each:
7552 \begin_layout Right Address
7554 \begin_inset Newline newline
7558 \begin_inset Newline newline
7562 \begin_inset Newline newline
7565 When is it? What is today?
7568 \begin_layout Standard
7572 \begin_inset space ~
7578 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7580 the largest block of text on a single line.
7581 Here's an example of the
7588 \begin_layout Address
7590 \begin_inset Newline newline
7593 Where do I send this
7594 \begin_inset Newline newline
7597 Your post office and country
7600 \begin_layout Standard
7601 As you can see, both
7608 \begin_inset space ~
7613 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7618 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7619 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7625 This makes sense, since
7633 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7634 Thus, you have to use
7641 arg "newline-insert newline"
7646 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7647 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7649 \begin_inset space ~
7653 \begin_inset space ~
7658 ) to start a new line in an
7665 \begin_inset space ~
7673 \begin_layout Subsection
7677 \begin_layout Standard
7678 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7679 or list of references.
7681 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7684 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7686 \begin_inset Index idx
7689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7698 \begin_layout Standard
7703 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7704 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7705 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7706 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7720 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7721 The book document classes ignores the
7725 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7729 in a letter document class.
7732 \begin_layout Standard
7737 environment does several things for you.
7738 First, it puts the centered label
7739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7747 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7749 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7750 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7751 the subsequent text.
7752 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7754 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7758 \begin_layout Standard
7759 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7763 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7764 The new paragraph will still be in the
7769 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7770 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 \begin_inset Float figure
7779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7781 \begin_inset Graphics
7782 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7790 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7795 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7816 \begin_layout Standard
7817 We would love to demonstrate the
7821 environment, but since this document is in the
7822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7829 class, we can't do this.
7830 We inserted it therefore as figure
7831 \begin_inset space ~
7835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7837 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7842 If you have never heard of an
7843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7850 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7853 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7855 \begin_inset Index idx
7858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7867 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7874 \begin_layout Standard
7879 environment is used to list references.
7880 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7881 only use it at the end of the document.
7893 \begin_layout Standard
7894 When you first open a
7898 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7899 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7915 depending on the document class.
7916 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7917 Each paragraph of the
7921 environment is a bibliography entry.
7926 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7927 Each new paragraph is still in the
7934 \begin_layout Standard
7935 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7936 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7938 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7940 handling, have a look at section
7941 \begin_inset space ~
7945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7947 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7954 \begin_layout Subsection
7955 Special Environments
7958 \begin_layout Standard
7960 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7961 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7969 \begin_inset Index idx
7972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7982 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7989 \begin_layout Standard
7995 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7997 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8002 key as a fixed whitespace.
8006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8019 \begin_inset space ~
8024 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8042 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8045 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8048 arg "newline-insert newline"
8065 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8066 So, when you finish using the
8071 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8072 Also, you can nest the
8077 environment inside of others.
8080 \begin_layout Standard
8081 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8084 \begin_layout Itemize
8088 arg "newline-insert newline"
8091 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8096 \begin_inset space \space{}
8106 arg "newline-insert newline"
8112 \begin_layout Itemize
8116 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8132 \begin_layout Itemize
8133 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8134 You must put at least one
8138 in any line you want blank.
8139 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8143 \begin_layout Itemize
8144 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8148 since that will insert
8153 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8156 arg "self-insert \""
8162 \begin_layout Standard
8166 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8170 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8174 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8178 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8182 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8183 printf("Hello World!
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout Standard
8197 This is just the standard
8198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8215 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8217 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8218 as if you used a typewriter.
8219 \begin_inset Index idx
8222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8223 Paragraph environments|)
8228 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8231 Program Code Listings
8236 \begin_inset space ~
8244 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8248 \begin_inset Index idx
8251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8260 \begin_layout Standard
8265 environment is similar to the
8270 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8271 computer console text.
8276 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8290 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8291 you can have empty lines.
8304 \begin_layout Itemize
8305 have a certain language and a text style
8308 \begin_layout Itemize
8309 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8310 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8311 and \SpecialChar TeX
8315 \begin_layout Standard
8316 Because of these properties
8320 works like a typewriter.
8324 \begin_layout Verbatim
8328 \begin_layout Verbatim
8331 The following 2 lines are empty:
8334 \begin_layout Verbatim
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8348 \begin_layout Standard
8353 environment is identical to
8357 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8358 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8365 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8369 \begin_layout Section
8370 Nesting Environments
8371 \begin_inset Index idx
8374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8375 Nesting ! Environments
8381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8390 \begin_layout Subsection
8394 \begin_layout Standard
8396 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8398 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8400 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8402 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8414 \begin_layout Enumerate
8418 \begin_layout Enumerate
8423 \begin_layout Enumerate
8427 \begin_layout Enumerate
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Standard
8437 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8438 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8440 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8442 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_inset space ~
8454 \begin_inset space ~
8458 \begin_inset space ~
8463 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8465 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8468 arg "depth-increment"
8474 arg "depth-decrement"
8488 arg "depth-increment"
8494 arg "depth-decrement"
8498 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8499 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8503 \begin_layout Standard
8504 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8505 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8506 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8507 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8508 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8512 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8514 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8516 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8519 \begin_layout Subsection
8520 What You Can and Can't Nest
8523 \begin_layout Standard
8524 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8525 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8528 \begin_layout Standard
8529 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8530 than a simple yes or no.
8531 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8534 \begin_layout Itemize
8535 Completely unnestable
8538 \begin_layout Itemize
8539 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8543 \begin_layout Itemize
8544 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8548 \begin_layout Standard
8549 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8550 environments have them:
8553 \begin_layout Description
8554 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8555 Can't nest into them.
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 \begin_layout Itemize
8571 \begin_layout Itemize
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Description
8592 \begin_inset space ~
8595 Nestable You can nest them.
8596 You can nest other things into them.
8600 \begin_layout Itemize
8606 \begin_layout Itemize
8612 \begin_layout Itemize
8618 \begin_layout Itemize
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Description
8663 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8664 You can't nest anything into them.
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Itemize
8686 \begin_layout Itemize
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8750 \begin_inset space ~
8756 \begin_layout Itemize
8763 \begin_layout Standard
8764 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8772 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8782 \begin_inset space ~
8785 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8786 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8787 nested section headings violate this.
8795 \begin_layout Subsection
8796 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8797 \begin_inset Index idx
8800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8801 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8809 \begin_layout Standard
8810 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8811 affected by nesting anyhow.
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Itemize
8823 \begin_layout Itemize
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8829 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8837 Figures and tables in
8841 are not affected by this.
8846 Have a look at section
8847 \begin_inset space ~
8851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8853 reference "sec:Floats"
8857 for more information about
8864 \begin_layout Standard
8866 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8867 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8871 \begin_layout Standard
8872 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8880 of its own, it behaves just like a
8881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8888 paragraph environment.
8889 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8893 \begin_layout Standard
8894 Here's an example with a table:
8897 \begin_layout Enumerate
8902 \begin_layout Enumerate
8903 This is (a) and it's nested.
8907 \begin_layout Standard
8908 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8914 \begin_layout Standard
8916 \begin_inset Tabular
8917 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8918 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8919 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8920 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9004 \begin_layout Standard
9005 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9012 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9018 \begin_layout Enumerate
9022 \begin_layout Standard
9023 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9032 This is (a) and it's nested.
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9043 \begin_layout Standard
9045 \begin_inset Tabular
9046 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9047 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9048 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9049 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9133 \begin_layout Standard
9134 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9140 \begin_layout Enumerate
9147 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9150 \begin_layout Enumerate
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9159 \begin_layout Standard
9160 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9163 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9166 \begin_layout Enumerate
9171 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 This is (a) and it's nested.
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9176 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9182 \begin_layout Standard
9184 \begin_inset Tabular
9185 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9186 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9273 \begin_layout Standard
9274 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9280 \begin_layout Enumerate
9282 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9289 \begin_layout Enumerate
9293 \begin_layout Standard
9294 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9300 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9301 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9305 \begin_layout Subsection
9306 Usage and General Features
9309 \begin_layout Standard
9310 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9311 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9320 is the innermost possible depth.
9321 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9324 \begin_layout Enumerate
9325 level #1 – outermost
9329 \begin_layout Enumerate
9334 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 \begin_layout Enumerate
9344 \begin_layout Itemize
9349 \begin_layout Itemize
9358 \begin_layout Standard
9359 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9360 both of them in the example.
9361 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9371 For example, if we tried to nest another
9376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9383 , we would get errors.
9386 \begin_layout Subsection
9388 \begin_inset Index idx
9391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9400 \begin_layout Standard
9401 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9402 We have several examples of nested environments.
9403 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9408 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9411 \begin_layout Labeling
9412 \labelwidthstring MMM
9413 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9422 \begin_layout Labeling
9423 \labelwidthstring MMM
9424 #2-a This is level #2.
9425 We created it by using
9428 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9434 arg "depth-increment"
9441 \begin_layout Labeling
9442 \labelwidthstring MMM
9443 #3-a This is level #3.
9444 This time, we just enter
9451 arg "depth-increment"
9455 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9459 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9465 arg "depth-increment"
9472 \begin_layout Standard
9477 environment, nested inside of
9478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9486 So, it's at level #4.
9487 We did this by entering
9490 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9496 arg "depth-increment"
9499 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9504 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9520 \begin_layout Standard
9525 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9528 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9534 \begin_layout Labeling
9535 \labelwidthstring MMM
9536 #4-a This is level #4.
9540 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9543 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9548 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9552 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9557 keep nesting things inside
9558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9569 \begin_layout Labeling
9570 \labelwidthstring MMM
9571 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9579 and this is level #6.
9580 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9584 \begin_layout Labeling
9585 \labelwidthstring MMM
9586 #5-b Back to level #5.
9590 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9596 arg "depth-decrement"
9603 \begin_layout Labeling
9604 \labelwidthstring MMM
9608 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9614 arg "depth-decrement"
9617 , we're back at level #4.
9621 \begin_layout Labeling
9622 \labelwidthstring MMM
9623 #3-b Back to level #3.
9624 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9628 \begin_layout Labeling
9629 \labelwidthstring MMM
9630 #2-b Back to level #2.
9635 \begin_layout Labeling
9636 \labelwidthstring MMM
9637 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9638 After this sentence, we will enter
9642 and change the paragraph environment back to
9649 \begin_layout Standard
9650 We could have also used the
9666 environment in place of the
9671 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9674 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9675 Example 2: Inheritance
9678 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9679 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9682 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9691 arg "depth-increment"
9695 \begin_inset Newline newline
9698 which, we will change to the
9706 \begin_layout Enumerate
9711 environment, at level #2.
9714 \begin_layout Enumerate
9715 Notice how the nested
9719 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9723 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9727 \begin_layout Standard
9728 We ended this example by entering
9733 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9737 and reset the nesting depth by using
9740 arg "depth-decrement"
9746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9747 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9756 \begin_inset Argument 1
9759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9760 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9768 \begin_layout Enumerate
9769 This is level #1, in an
9773 paragraph environment.
9774 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9778 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9789 arg "depth-increment"
9793 Now, what happens if we nest an
9797 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9798 label be? An asterisk?
9802 \begin_layout Itemize
9812 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9813 So, its label is a bullet.
9814 (We got here by using
9817 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9823 arg "depth-increment"
9826 , then changing the environment to
9834 \begin_layout Itemize
9835 Here's level #4, produced using
9838 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9844 arg "depth-increment"
9848 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9853 \begin_layout Enumerate
9856 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9861 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9865 , because we are in the
9873 environment (that is, it is an
9888 \begin_layout Enumerate
9893 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9894 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9898 \begin_layout Enumerate
9899 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9902 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9905 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9908 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 arg "depth-decrement"
9915 to decrease the depth after the next
9918 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9925 \begin_layout Enumerate
9927 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9932 \begin_layout Enumerate
9934 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9935 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9939 \begin_layout Enumerate
9940 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9949 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9954 reset the counter for the label.
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9962 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9968 arg "depth-decrement"
9971 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9972 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9973 into the twofold-nested
9981 \begin_layout Enumerate
9982 The same thing happens if we do another
9985 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9991 arg "depth-decrement"
9994 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9997 \begin_layout Standard
9998 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10003 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10014 The number of other
10018 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10025 The same rule applies for the
10029 environment, as well.
10032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10033 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10036 \begin_layout Enumerate
10037 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10038 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10039 the same detail with how we did it.
10048 \begin_layout Standard
10056 arg "depth-increment"
10063 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10064 the example in parentheses someplace.
10065 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10066 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10067 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10071 \begin_layout Enumerate
10076 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10080 \begin_layout Verse
10081 Now we will add verse.
10082 \begin_inset Newline newline
10085 It will get much worse.
10086 \begin_inset Newline newline
10096 arg "depth-increment"
10106 \begin_layout Verse
10107 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10108 \begin_inset Newline newline
10111 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10112 \begin_inset Newline newline
10118 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10126 \begin_layout Verse
10127 Here comes a table:
10131 \begin_layout Standard
10132 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10138 \begin_layout Standard
10140 \begin_inset Tabular
10141 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10142 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10229 \begin_layout Verse
10233 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10243 arg "depth-increment"
10249 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10255 \begin_inset Newline newline
10263 arg "depth-decrement"
10270 \begin_layout Enumerate
10275 : level #1) This is another item.
10276 Note that selecting a
10280 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10281 3 times to put the table inside the
10289 \begin_layout Quotation
10290 We're now ending the
10294 list and changing to
10299 We're still at level #1.
10300 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10301 The next set of paragraphs is a
10302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10309 We will nest both the
10316 \begin_inset space ~
10321 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10325 for the letter body.
10329 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10332 to preserve the depth.
10333 Remember that you need to use
10336 arg "newline-insert newline"
10339 to create multiple lines inside the
10346 \begin_inset space ~
10356 \begin_layout Right Address
10358 \begin_inset Newline newline
10361 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10362 \begin_inset Newline newline
10368 \begin_layout Address
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10376 \begin_layout Quotation
10377 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10381 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10382 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10383 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10384 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10385 as soon as possible.
10386 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10389 \begin_layout Quotation
10390 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10391 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10392 with your order, along with payment.
10395 \begin_layout Quotation
10396 We thank you again for your patience.
10399 \begin_layout Address
10401 \begin_inset Newline newline
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 That ends that example!
10412 \begin_layout Standard
10413 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10414 gives you a lot of power with just
10416 We could have easily nested an
10437 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10440 \begin_layout Subsection
10442 \begin_inset Index idx
10445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10446 Nesting ! Separation
10452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10454 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10461 \begin_layout Standard
10462 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10464 For example you need two different enumerations:
10467 \begin_layout Enumerate
10472 \begin_layout Enumerate
10477 \begin_layout Enumerate
10481 \begin_layout Standard
10482 \begin_inset Separator plain
10488 \begin_layout Itemize
10494 \begin_layout Standard
10495 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10501 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Enumerate
10509 \begin_layout Enumerate
10513 \begin_layout Standard
10514 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10515 list item and use the menu
10517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10518 Start New Environment
10521 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10522 ) and behind it the new list.
10525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10526 Start New Parent Environment
10528 only appears if the item is nested.
10529 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10533 \begin_layout Standard
10534 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10535 (red arrow in LyX).
10536 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10537 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10540 \begin_layout Standard
10541 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10544 arg "paragraph-break"
10551 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10554 \begin_layout Section
10555 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10556 \begin_inset Index idx
10559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10568 \begin_layout Standard
10569 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10570 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10572 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10573 be broken at the end of a line.
10574 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10578 \begin_layout Subsection
10580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10582 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10587 \begin_inset Index idx
10590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10599 \begin_layout Standard
10600 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10601 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10602 ) not to break the line at
10604 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10607 \begin_layout Quote
10608 Further documentation is given in section
10609 \begin_inset Newline newline
10613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10615 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10623 \begin_layout Standard
10624 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10639 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10648 A protected space is set with
10650 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10651 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10653 \begin_inset space ~
10661 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10667 \begin_layout Subsection
10669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10671 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10676 \begin_inset Index idx
10679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10680 Spacing ! Horizontal
10688 \begin_layout Standard
10689 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10692 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10696 The length units are listed in Appendix
10697 \begin_inset space ~
10701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10703 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10714 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10719 \begin_inset Index idx
10722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10723 Spaces ! Inter-word
10731 \begin_layout Standard
10732 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10733 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10734 at the ends of sentences.
10735 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10736 automatically takes care about this.
10737 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10738 followed by a period; see section
10739 \begin_inset space ~
10743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10745 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10750 To insert a normal space, select
10752 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10753 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10755 \begin_inset space ~
10763 arg "space-insert normal"
10769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10773 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10778 \begin_inset Index idx
10781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10790 \begin_layout Standard
10792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10799 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10808 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10809 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10810 inside abbreviations:
10813 \begin_layout Quote
10815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10819 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10822 \begin_layout Standard
10823 or between values and units.
10824 Compare for example this:
10825 \begin_inset Newline newline
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 \begin_inset Newline newline
10836 10 kg (normal space
10839 \begin_layout Standard
10840 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10842 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10843 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10845 \begin_inset space ~
10853 arg "space-insert thin"
10859 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10863 \begin_layout Standard
10864 You can also insert the following space types:
10867 \begin_layout Description
10869 \begin_inset space ~
10873 \begin_inset space ~
10876 space A line with a
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10881 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10885 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10888 negative thin space between the arrows.
10891 \begin_layout Description
10893 \begin_inset space ~
10897 \begin_inset space ~
10900 space A line with a
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10905 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10909 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10912 negative medium space between the arrows.
10915 \begin_layout Description
10917 \begin_inset space ~
10921 \begin_inset space ~
10924 space A line with a
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10929 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10933 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10936 negative thick space between the arrows.
10939 \begin_layout Description
10941 \begin_inset space ~
10945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10953 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10957 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10961 \begin_inset space ~
10965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10968 em) space between the arrows.
10971 \begin_layout Description
10973 \begin_inset space ~
10977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10981 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10985 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10989 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10993 \begin_inset space ~
10997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11000 em) space between the arrows.
11003 \begin_layout Description
11005 \begin_inset space ~
11009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11013 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11017 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11021 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11025 \begin_inset space ~
11029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11032 em) space between the arrows.
11035 \begin_layout Description
11037 \begin_inset space ~
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11045 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11050 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11057 cm space between the arrows.
11060 \begin_layout Standard
11062 \begin_inset space ~
11066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11068 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11072 lists the different space sizes.
11075 \begin_layout Standard
11076 \begin_inset Float table
11081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11082 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11087 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11091 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset Tabular
11102 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11103 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11104 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11105 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11378 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11380 \begin_inset Index idx
11383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11392 \begin_layout Standard
11393 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11394 feature for adding extra space
11395 in a uniform fashion.
11396 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11397 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11398 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11399 equally between themselves.
11402 \begin_layout Standard
11403 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11406 \begin_layout Quote
11408 This is on the left side
11409 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11412 This is on the right
11415 \begin_layout Quote
11418 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11422 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11428 \begin_layout Quote
11431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11435 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11439 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11445 \begin_layout Standard
11446 That was an example in the
11452 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11456 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11460 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11463 is one in a standard paragraph.
11464 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11468 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11471 \begin_layout Standard
11472 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11475 \begin_inset space ~
11480 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11483 \begin_layout Standard
11485 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11495 \begin_layout Standard
11497 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11501 \begin_inset space ~
11507 \begin_layout Standard
11509 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11513 \begin_inset space ~
11519 \begin_layout Standard
11521 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11525 \begin_inset space ~
11531 \begin_layout Standard
11533 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11537 \begin_inset space ~
11543 \begin_layout Standard
11545 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11549 \begin_inset space ~
11555 \begin_layout Standard
11556 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11564 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11568 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11570 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11571 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11575 option in the space dialog.
11583 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11587 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11592 \begin_inset Index idx
11595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11604 \begin_layout Standard
11605 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11606 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11609 \begin_layout Standard
11610 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11613 What is correct English?:
11614 \begin_inset Newline newline
11618 \begin_inset Newline newline
11622 \begin_inset space ~
11625 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11626 \begin_inset Newline newline
11630 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11641 \begin_inset Newline newline
11645 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11656 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11662 \begin_layout Standard
11664 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11669 \begin_inset space ~
11673 \begin_inset space ~
11677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11681 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11688 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11694 \begin_inset space ~
11698 \begin_inset space ~
11702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11705 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11714 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11715 That is why it is named
11716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11724 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11725 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11729 \begin_layout Subsection
11731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11733 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11738 \begin_inset Index idx
11741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11750 \begin_layout Standard
11751 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11753 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11754 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11756 \begin_inset space ~
11762 There you find the following sizes:
11765 \begin_layout Standard
11778 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11779 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11784 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11787 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11789 \begin_inset space ~
11795 \begin_inset Index idx
11798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11799 Document ! Settings
11804 for the paragraph separation.
11805 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11816 \begin_layout Standard
11822 \begin_inset Index idx
11825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11831 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11832 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11837 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11838 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11847 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11856 s are described in section
11857 \begin_inset space ~
11861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11863 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11872 If there are several
11876 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11877 You can therefore use
11881 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11884 \begin_layout Standard
11889 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11890 \begin_inset space ~
11894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11896 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11903 \begin_layout Standard
11904 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11914 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11915 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11927 \begin_layout Subsection
11928 Paragraph Alignment
11929 \begin_inset Index idx
11932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11933 Paragraph ! Alignment
11941 \begin_layout Standard
11942 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11944 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11947 dialog (toolbar button
11950 arg "layout-paragraph"
11954 There are five possibilities:
11957 \begin_layout Itemize
11965 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11971 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11993 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11999 \begin_layout Itemize
12007 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12013 \begin_layout Itemize
12021 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12027 \begin_layout Standard
12028 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12029 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12030 the left and right margins.
12031 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12034 \begin_layout Standard
12036 This paragraph is right aligned,
12039 \begin_layout Standard
12041 this one is centered,
12044 \begin_layout Standard
12046 this one is left aligned.
12049 \begin_layout Subsection
12051 \begin_inset Index idx
12054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12055 Page breaks ! Forced
12061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12063 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12070 \begin_layout Standard
12071 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12072 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12073 force a page break where you want one.
12074 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12075 is good at page breaking.
12076 Only if you use a lot of
12080 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12081 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12086 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12090 have to change the page breaking.
12093 \begin_layout Standard
12094 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12096 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12098 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12099 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12101 \begin_inset space ~
12107 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12109 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12110 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 \begin_inset space ~
12117 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12119 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12120 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12123 \begin_layout Standard
12124 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12125 at the top of a page.
12126 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12128 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12129 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12130 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12134 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12138 to learn more about
12145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12149 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12154 \begin_inset Index idx
12157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12158 Page breaks ! Clear
12166 \begin_layout Standard
12167 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12168 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12169 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12170 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12171 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12174 \begin_layout Standard
12175 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12178 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12180 \begin_inset space ~
12186 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12188 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12189 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 \begin_inset space ~
12195 \begin_inset space ~
12200 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12201 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12204 \begin_layout Subsection
12206 \begin_inset Index idx
12209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12218 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12225 \begin_layout Standard
12226 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12228 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12231 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12233 \begin_inset space ~
12237 \begin_inset space ~
12245 arg "newline-insert newline"
12249 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12252 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 \begin_inset space ~
12258 \begin_inset space ~
12266 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12269 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12271 This is useful to avoid
12272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12279 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12282 \begin_layout Standard
12283 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12284 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12286 very good at line breaking.
12287 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12288 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12289 \begin_inset space ~
12293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12295 reference "sec:Quote"
12300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12302 reference "sec:Verse"
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12309 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12316 \begin_layout Subsection
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12320 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12325 \begin_inset Index idx
12328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12337 \begin_layout Standard
12339 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12350 \begin_layout Standard
12354 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12355 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12357 \begin_inset space ~
12362 you can insert horizontal lines.
12363 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12364 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12365 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12368 \begin_layout Standard
12370 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12381 \begin_layout Section
12382 Characters and Symbols
12385 \begin_layout Standard
12386 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12387 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12388 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12396 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12400 for information on how this is done.
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12409 dialog via the menu
12411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12412 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12418 \begin_layout Standard
12419 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12427 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12428 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12430 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12438 \begin_layout Section
12439 Fonts and Text Styles
12440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12442 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12449 \begin_layout Subsection
12451 \begin_inset Index idx
12454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12463 \begin_layout Standard
12464 There are two types of fonts:
12467 \begin_layout Description
12469 \begin_inset space ~
12473 \begin_inset Index idx
12476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12482 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12487 characters) in the font.
12488 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12489 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12490 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12491 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12492 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12493 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12494 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12495 \begin_inset Newline newline
12498 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12499 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12500 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12501 sizes than at small ones.
12502 \begin_inset Newline newline
12516 \begin_inset space ~
12524 \begin_layout Description
12526 \begin_inset space ~
12530 \begin_inset Index idx
12533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12539 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12540 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12541 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12542 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12543 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12544 image manipulation program.
12545 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12546 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12547 \begin_inset space ~
12550 pixels high up to 34
12551 \begin_inset space ~
12554 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12555 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12556 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12558 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12559 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12560 \begin_inset Newline newline
12563 Bitmap fonts are named
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12571 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12574 \begin_layout Standard
12575 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12576 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12577 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12578 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12579 use scalable fonts.
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12583 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12586 \begin_layout Standard
12587 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12588 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12589 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12590 font to emphasize text, you use an
12591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12599 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12601 In \SpecialChar LyX
12602 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12606 \begin_layout Subsection
12609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12611 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12618 \begin_layout Standard
12619 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12620 used its own fonts.
12621 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12622 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12625 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12626 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12627 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12628 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12629 to a word processor.
12630 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12631 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12632 files are very portable across
12633 different machines.
12634 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12635 has increased a lot
12636 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12639 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12641 \begin_inset space ~
12645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12647 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12652 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 code in the document
12654 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12657 \begin_layout Standard
12658 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12659 engines that are also able directly
12660 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12662 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12664 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12666 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12667 that is installed on your system.
12668 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12671 \begin_layout Standard
12672 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12680 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12681 es; so you might have to experiment.
12689 \begin_layout Subsection
12690 Document Font and Font size
12691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12693 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12698 \begin_inset Index idx
12701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12708 \begin_inset Index idx
12711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12720 \begin_layout Standard
12721 You can set the document fonts in the
12723 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12727 \begin_inset Index idx
12730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12731 Document ! Settings
12741 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12742 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12745 \begin_inset space ~
12754 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12756 \begin_inset space ~
12759 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12762 \begin_layout Standard
12767 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12768 This requires that you use
12780 as the output format, i.
12781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12785 \begin_inset space \space{}
12788 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12789 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12790 installed (see section
12791 \begin_inset space ~
12795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12797 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12802 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12804 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12805 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12807 \begin_inset space ~
12810 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12811 cannot determine the family.
12812 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12813 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12816 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12819 \begin_layout Standard
12820 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12821 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12826 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12832 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12833 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12841 \begin_inset space ~
12847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12860 European Computer Modern
12863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12870 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12873 \begin_layout Standard
12882 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12883 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12888 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12891 \begin_inset space ~
12896 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12902 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12903 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12906 \begin_layout Itemize
12910 \begin_inset space ~
12915 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12928 \begin_inset space ~
12933 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12934 community in order to replace
12938 as the default font.
12939 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12940 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12943 \begin_inset space ~
12956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12957 One difference is improved kerning.
12965 \begin_layout Itemize
12969 \begin_inset space ~
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12978 fonts in (the rare) case that
12981 \begin_inset space ~
12986 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13001 Virtual means that it
13002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13013 -glyphs from other fonts.
13014 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13036 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13042 \begin_inset Index idx
13045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13047 -packages ! aeguill
13052 with the document preamble line
13053 \begin_inset Newline newline
13060 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13061 \begin_inset Newline newline
13066 will fix the guillemet problem.
13071 and that accented characters are not
13075 glyph, but built of
13079 characters, the accent and the letter.
13080 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13086 If you search for example for the French word
13087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13094 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13103 and not for the glyph
13104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13108 \begin_inset space ~
13112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13118 \begin_layout Itemize
13119 If you do not like the look of
13127 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13138 \begin_inset space ~
13148 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13149 \begin_inset space ~
13152 serif and typewriter fonts,
13156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13157 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13164 \begin_inset space ~
13173 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13178 \begin_inset space \space{}
13186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13190 \begin_inset space \space{}
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13204 \begin_inset space ~
13214 but you can also select your own.
13215 \begin_inset Newline newline
13218 The differences between roman,
13221 \begin_inset space ~
13230 fonts are explained in section
13231 \begin_inset space ~
13235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13237 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13242 \begin_inset Newline newline
13248 \begin_inset space ~
13253 was originally designed for newspapers.
13254 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13255 into the small newspaper columns.
13259 \begin_inset space ~
13264 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13267 \begin_layout Standard
13268 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13281 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13286 depends on the class you are using.
13287 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13290 \begin_layout Standard
13291 Note that the font size is the
13296 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13297 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13298 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13299 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13302 \begin_inset space ~
13308 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13309 \begin_inset space ~
13313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13315 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13322 \begin_layout Standard
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13331 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13333 \begin_inset space ~
13336 serif or typewriter.
13341 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13351 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13354 \begin_layout Standard
13359 LaTeX font encoding
13361 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13362 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13368 \begin_inset Index idx
13371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13373 -packages ! fontenc
13379 \begin_inset space ~
13383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13385 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13390 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13391 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13398 \begin_layout Standard
13399 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13401 Use Old Style Figures
13405 Use True Small Caps
13408 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13411 Use Old Style Figures
13413 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13415 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13423 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13427 Use True Small Caps
13429 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13430 of scaled capitals.
13431 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13432 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13435 \begin_layout Standard
13440 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13441 a font to display the script characters.
13445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13446 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13452 \begin_inset Index idx
13455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13462 So this has no effect for the document language
13476 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13480 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13488 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13493 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13494 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13496 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13498 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13501 dialog, see section
13502 \begin_inset space ~
13506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13508 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13520 \begin_layout Subsection
13524 \begin_layout Standard
13525 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13526 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13528 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13529 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13530 choose a math font in the dialog
13532 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13536 \begin_inset Index idx
13539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13540 Document ! Settings
13546 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13547 automatically selects a math font.
13548 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13549 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13558 \begin_inset space ~
13564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13569 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13570 document font is available.
13573 \begin_layout Standard
13574 Note that the math font will not be used for
13578 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13584 or by the insertion of the command
13591 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13592 \begin_inset space ~
13596 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13597 while the math characters do not.
13599 \begin_inset space ~
13602 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13613 \begin_inset space ~
13618 in the document font settings.
13621 \begin_layout Standard
13622 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13623 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13624 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13625 font (in most cases
13626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13632 \begin_inset space ~
13638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13641 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13642 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13650 \begin_inset space ~
13656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13662 \begin_layout Subsection
13663 Using Different Character Styles
13664 \begin_inset Index idx
13667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13674 \begin_inset Index idx
13677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13686 \begin_layout Standard
13687 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13688 automatically changes the character style for certain
13689 paragraph environments.
13691 supports two character styles,
13700 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13709 style, do one of the following:
13712 \begin_layout Itemize
13713 click on the toolbar button
13722 \begin_layout Itemize
13723 use the key binding
13732 \begin_layout Standard
13733 These commands are all toggles.
13738 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13741 \begin_layout Standard
13742 One typically uses the
13746 style for proper names.
13748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13755 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13763 \begin_layout Standard
13764 A more widely used character style is the
13769 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13776 \begin_layout Itemize
13777 clicking on the toolbar button
13786 \begin_layout Itemize
13787 using the keybindings
13796 \begin_layout Standard
13801 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13803 use a different font.
13806 \begin_layout Standard
13807 We've been using the
13811 style all over the place in this document.
13812 Here's one more example:
13815 \begin_layout Quotation
13818 Do not overuse character styles!
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13822 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13823 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13824 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13825 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13829 \begin_layout Standard
13830 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13838 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13840 \begin_inset space ~
13843 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13849 arg "dialog-show character"
13855 \begin_layout Subsection
13856 Fine-Tuning with the
13861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13863 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13868 \begin_inset Index idx
13871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13880 \begin_layout Standard
13881 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13883 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13884 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13885 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13886 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13887 from ordinary dialog.
13890 \begin_layout Standard
13891 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13892 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13893 \begin_inset Newline newline
13896 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13897 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13900 \begin_layout Standard
13901 To use custom character styles, open the
13903 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13905 \begin_inset space ~
13908 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13911 dialog or press the toolbar button
13914 arg "dialog-show character"
13918 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13919 font property that you can choose.
13920 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13923 \begin_inset space ~
13928 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13933 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13934 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13935 environments all at once.
13938 \begin_layout Standard
13939 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13942 \begin_inset space ~
13954 \begin_layout Labeling
13955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13969 The possible options are:
13973 \begin_layout Labeling
13974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13979 This is the Roman font family.
13980 Normally a serif font.
13981 It's also the default family.
13991 \begin_layout Labeling
13992 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13996 \begin_inset space ~
14003 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14015 \begin_layout Labeling
14016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14023 This is the Typewriter font family.
14029 arg "font-typewriter"
14038 \begin_layout Labeling
14039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14044 This corresponds to the print weight.
14049 \begin_layout Labeling
14050 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14055 This is the Medium font series.
14056 It's also the default series.
14059 \begin_layout Labeling
14060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14067 This is the Bold font series.
14080 \begin_layout Labeling
14081 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14086 As the name implies.
14091 \begin_layout Labeling
14092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14097 This is the Upright font shape.
14098 It's also the default shape.
14101 \begin_layout Labeling
14102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14116 s the Italic font shape
14122 \begin_layout Labeling
14123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14130 This is the Slanted font shape
14132 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14133 , this is different from italic).
14136 \begin_layout Labeling
14137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14141 \begin_inset space ~
14148 This is the Small caps font shape
14155 \begin_layout Labeling
14156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14161 Alters the text color.
14162 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14166 \begin_inset space ~
14171 , which means that the document default color set in
14173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14180 \begin_inset space ~
14185 is used, you can choose between
14262 \begin_inset Index idx
14265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14274 \begin_layout Labeling
14275 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14280 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14281 the language of the document.
14282 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14283 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14285 \begin_inset Newline newline
14288 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14290 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14291 When using the spell checking (see section
14292 \begin_inset space ~
14296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14298 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14302 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14305 \begin_layout Labeling
14306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14311 Alters the size of the font.
14312 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14313 proportional to the document font size.
14314 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14315 the details, but a general description of what
14321 \begin_layout Labeling
14322 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14343 arg "font-size tiny"
14349 \begin_layout Labeling
14350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14371 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14377 \begin_layout Labeling
14378 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14399 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14405 \begin_layout Labeling
14406 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14427 arg "font-size small"
14433 \begin_layout Labeling
14434 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14448 It's also the default size.
14452 arg "font-size normal"
14458 \begin_layout Labeling
14459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14480 arg "font-size large"
14486 \begin_layout Labeling
14487 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14508 arg "font-size larger"
14514 \begin_layout Labeling
14515 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14536 arg "font-size largest"
14542 \begin_layout Labeling
14543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14564 arg "font-size huge"
14570 \begin_layout Labeling
14571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14592 arg "font-size giant"
14598 \begin_layout Labeling
14599 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14604 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14624 arg "font-size increase"
14630 \begin_layout Labeling
14631 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14636 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14656 arg "font-size decrease"
14663 \begin_layout Standard
14668 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14669 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14671 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14672 — use those instead.
14673 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14676 \begin_layout Labeling
14677 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14682 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14687 \begin_layout Labeling
14688 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14695 This is text with emphasize on
14698 This might seem like the same as
14702 , but it is actually a bit different.
14708 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14710 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14713 \begin_layout Labeling
14714 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14721 This is text with Underbar on.
14727 arg "font-underline"
14733 \begin_inset Newline newline
14738 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14739 when you could not change fonts.
14740 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14741 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14742 because some people
14746 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14749 \begin_layout Labeling
14750 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14754 \begin_inset space ~
14761 This is text with Double underbar on.
14767 arg "font-underunderline"
14771 \begin_inset Newline newline
14774 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14775 about double underbar.
14778 \begin_layout Labeling
14779 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14783 \begin_inset space ~
14790 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14796 arg "font-underwave"
14800 \begin_inset Newline newline
14803 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14804 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14807 \begin_layout Labeling
14808 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14815 This is text with Strikeout on.
14821 arg "font-strikeout"
14825 \begin_inset Newline newline
14828 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14829 changed in the meantime.
14832 \begin_layout Labeling
14833 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14840 This is text with Noun on.
14847 , this is a logical attribute.
14848 Normally it's equivalent to
14851 \begin_inset space ~
14860 \begin_layout Standard
14861 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14862 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14864 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14866 \begin_inset space ~
14869 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14875 arg "dialog-show character"
14878 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14879 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14882 arg "textstyle-apply"
14886 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14890 \begin_layout Standard
14891 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14898 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14899 (suppose you just set the shape to
14900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14918 \begin_inset space ~
14930 \begin_layout Standard
14931 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14939 \begin_inset space ~
14951 \begin_layout Itemize
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14964 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14982 \begin_inset Newline newline
14986 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15000 \begin_inset Note Note
15003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15004 For more on phantoms see section
15005 \begin_inset space ~
15009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15011 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15021 \begin_inset Newline newline
15027 \begin_layout Itemize
15032 fonts use characters with serifs.
15033 These are the small
15034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15041 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15042 The following example shows the difference:
15043 \begin_inset Newline newline
15047 \begin_inset Newline newline
15052 text without serifs
15055 \begin_inset Newline newline
15058 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15059 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15066 \begin_layout Itemize
15071 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15072 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15073 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15076 \begin_layout Standard
15077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15084 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15085 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15088 \begin_inset space ~
15093 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15094 the property to be removed.
15095 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15096 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15097 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15115 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15116 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15124 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15128 \begin_inset space ~
15133 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15144 If you, for example, set
15145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15163 \begin_inset space ~
15168 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15177 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15180 \begin_layout Standard
15181 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15182 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15185 \begin_layout Section
15186 Printing and Previewing
15189 \begin_layout Subsection
15193 \begin_layout Standard
15194 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15195 using \SpecialChar LyX
15196 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15197 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15198 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15199 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15201 Additional Features
15206 \begin_layout Standard
15208 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15211 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15212 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15213 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15216 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15217 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15218 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15219 to turn your writing into printable output.
15220 This happens in two stages:
15223 \begin_layout Enumerate
15224 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15225 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15227 a file with the extension,
15228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15242 \begin_layout Enumerate
15243 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15244 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15245 to use the commands in the
15249 file to produce printable output.
15252 \begin_layout Subsection
15253 Output file formats
15254 \begin_inset Index idx
15257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15266 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15274 Simple text (ASCII)
15275 \begin_inset Index idx
15278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15279 File formats ! ASCII
15287 \begin_layout Standard
15288 This file type has the extension
15289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15301 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15305 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15312 \begin_layout Standard
15313 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15315 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15316 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15318 \begin_inset space ~
15324 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15325 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15326 bibliography (section
15327 \begin_inset space ~
15331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15333 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15338 If your document includes such material, use
15340 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15341 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15347 \begin_inset space ~
15351 \begin_inset space ~
15359 \begin_inset space ~
15363 \begin_inset space ~
15369 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15370 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15376 \begin_inset Index idx
15379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15380 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15389 \begin_layout Standard
15390 This file type has the extension
15391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15402 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15405 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15406 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15407 -Errors or to process it manually
15408 with console commands.
15409 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15410 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15411 's temporary directory whenever you
15412 view or export your document.
15415 \begin_layout Standard
15416 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15417 -file using the menu
15419 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15420 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15424 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15425 export variants are explained in section
15426 \begin_inset space ~
15430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15432 reference "subsec:Export"
15439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15441 \begin_inset Index idx
15444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15453 \begin_layout Standard
15454 This file type has the extension
15455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15475 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15476 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15477 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15481 \begin_layout Standard
15482 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15483 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15484 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15485 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15486 when you view the DVI.
15487 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15490 \begin_layout Standard
15491 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15493 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15494 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15499 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15500 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15502 \begin_inset space ~
15508 The latter option uses the program
15510 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15516 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15519 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15520 font access (see section
15521 \begin_inset space ~
15525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15527 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15532 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15533 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15540 \begin_inset Index idx
15543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15544 File formats ! PostScript
15552 \begin_layout Standard
15553 This file type has the extension
15554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15566 PostScript was developed by the company
15570 as a printer language.
15571 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15573 PostScript can be seen as a
15574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15577 programming language
15578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15581 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15586 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15593 \begin_inset Index idx
15596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15598 -packages ! pstricks
15608 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15611 \begin_layout Standard
15612 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15616 Encapsulated PostScript
15617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15620 (EPS, file extension
15621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15633 As \SpecialChar LyX
15634 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15635 convert them in the background to EPS.
15636 If, for example, you have 50
15637 \begin_inset space ~
15640 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15642 \begin_inset space ~
15645 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15646 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15648 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15649 EPS to avoid this problem.
15652 \begin_layout Standard
15653 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15655 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15656 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15662 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15664 \begin_inset Index idx
15667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15674 \begin_inset Index idx
15677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15686 \begin_layout Standard
15687 This file type has the extension
15688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15704 Portable Document Format
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15712 was derived from PostScript.
15713 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15722 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15723 looks exactly the same.
15726 \begin_layout Standard
15727 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15731 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15735 (JPG, file extension
15736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15763 Portable Network Graphics
15764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15767 (PNG, file extension
15768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15780 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15781 converts them in the
15782 background to one of these formats.
15783 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15784 will slow down your workflow.
15785 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15788 \begin_layout Standard
15789 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15791 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15797 \begin_layout Description
15799 \begin_inset space ~
15802 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15806 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15809 \begin_layout Description
15811 \begin_inset space ~
15818 ) This uses the program
15820 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15823 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15826 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15829 is a new engine, derived from
15833 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15834 access (see section
15835 \begin_inset space ~
15839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15841 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15846 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15847 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15852 \begin_layout Description
15854 \begin_inset space ~
15861 ) This uses the program
15866 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15872 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15873 font access (see section
15874 \begin_inset space ~
15878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15880 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15885 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15886 vertically written Japanese.
15889 \begin_layout Description
15891 \begin_inset space ~
15894 (cropped) This is the same as
15897 \begin_inset space ~
15902 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15903 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15904 to generate good-looking
15905 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15908 \begin_layout Description
15910 \begin_inset space ~
15913 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15917 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15921 \begin_layout Description
15923 \begin_inset space ~
15926 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15930 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15931 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15935 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15936 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15939 \begin_layout Standard
15943 \begin_inset space ~
15952 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15953 works without problems.
15954 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15955 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15959 \begin_inset space ~
15967 \begin_inset space ~
15972 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15982 \begin_inset Index idx
15985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15986 FileFormats ! XHTML
15992 \begin_inset Index idx
15995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16004 \begin_layout Standard
16005 This file type has the extension
16006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16018 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16019 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16020 When \SpecialChar LyX
16021 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16022 suitable for the purpose.
16023 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16026 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16029 between different formats, which are described in section
16031 Math Output in XHTML
16036 \begin_inset space ~
16044 \begin_layout Standard
16045 XHTML output remains
16046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16053 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16054 features are supported yet.
16058 and the World Wide Web
16062 Additional Features
16064 manual, for more information.
16067 \begin_layout Standard
16068 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16070 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16071 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16077 \begin_layout Subsection
16079 \begin_inset Index idx
16082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16091 \begin_layout Standard
16092 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16093 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16102 or use the toolbar button
16109 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16110 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16111 \begin_inset space ~
16115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16117 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16121 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16123 \begin_inset space ~
16127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16129 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16134 Further output formats can be selected via
16136 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16137 View (Other Formats)
16139 or the toolbar button
16148 \begin_layout Standard
16149 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16150 viewer window using the menu
16152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16158 Update (Other Formats)
16163 \begin_layout Standard
16164 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16167 To have a real output, export your document.
16170 \begin_layout Section
16171 A few Words about Typography
16172 \begin_inset Index idx
16175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16184 \begin_layout Subsection
16185 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16186 \begin_inset Index idx
16189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16196 \begin_inset Index idx
16199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16208 \begin_layout Standard
16209 In \SpecialChar LyX
16211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16222 character comes in four lengths: the
16234 , and the minus sign:
16235 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16241 \begin_layout Standard
16242 \begin_inset Tabular
16243 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16244 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16245 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16246 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16247 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16248 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16277 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16317 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16344 \begin_inset space ~
16347 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16354 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16381 \begin_inset space ~
16384 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16405 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16439 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16445 \begin_layout Standard
16446 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16458 character multiple times in a row.
16459 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16460 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16493 \begin_layout Standard
16494 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16495 math mode and has a length of its own.
16496 Here are some examples:
16499 \begin_layout Enumerate
16500 line- and page-breaks
16501 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16511 \begin_layout Enumerate
16513 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16523 \begin_layout Enumerate
16524 Oh — there's a dash.
16525 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16535 \begin_layout Enumerate
16536 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16540 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16550 \begin_layout Subsection
16552 \begin_inset Index idx
16555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16564 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16571 \begin_layout Standard
16572 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16573 but automatically in the output.
16574 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16580 \begin_inset Index idx
16583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16590 following the rules of the document language.
16593 \begin_layout Standard
16595 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16599 font and with unusual constructs, like
16600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16608 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16609 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16610 This is done with the menu
16612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16613 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16615 \begin_inset space ~
16621 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16623 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16627 \begin_layout Standard
16628 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16629 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16640 would then see the hyphen
16641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16648 as a hyphenation possibility.
16649 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16650 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16651 as described in section
16653 Prevent Hyphenation
16658 \begin_inset space ~
16666 \begin_layout Subsection
16668 \begin_inset Index idx
16671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16680 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16681 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16684 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16691 \begin_layout Standard
16692 When \SpecialChar LyX
16693 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16694 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16696 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16702 appropriate amount of space.
16703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16706 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16708 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16709 gets after another word.
16712 \begin_layout Standard
16713 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16714 not work in all cases.
16716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16727 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16728 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16731 \begin_layout Standard
16732 Here are some examples of
16736 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16739 \begin_layout Itemize
16744 \begin_layout Itemize
16749 \begin_layout Standard
16750 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16753 \begin_layout Itemize
16755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16759 this is too much space!
16762 \begin_layout Itemize
16767 \begin_layout Standard
16768 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16771 \begin_layout Standard
16772 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16775 \begin_layout Enumerate
16779 \begin_inset space ~
16784 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16785 \begin_inset space ~
16789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16791 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16796 \begin_inset Index idx
16799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16800 Spaces ! inter-word
16808 \begin_layout Enumerate
16812 \begin_inset space ~
16817 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16818 \begin_inset space ~
16822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16824 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16829 \begin_inset Index idx
16832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16841 \begin_layout Enumerate
16845 \begin_inset space ~
16849 \begin_inset space ~
16853 \begin_inset space ~
16860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16862 \begin_inset space ~
16867 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16868 This function is also bound to
16871 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16877 \begin_layout Standard
16878 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16881 \begin_layout Itemize
16883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16887 \begin_inset space \space{}
16890 this is too much space!
16893 \begin_layout Itemize
16894 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16898 \begin_layout Standard
16899 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16900 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16902 will take care of this.
16905 \begin_layout Standard
16906 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16910 \begin_inset space ~
16916 feature described in the section
16918 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16923 Additional Features
16928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16930 \begin_inset Index idx
16933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16934 Typography ! Quotes
16940 \begin_inset Index idx
16943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16974 \begin_layout Standard
16976 usually sets quotes correctly.
16977 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16978 and use a closing quote at the end.
16980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16988 The keyboard character,
16992 , generates this automatically.
16995 \begin_layout Standard
16996 You can specify what character the
17000 key produces using the submenu
17006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17010 \begin_inset Index idx
17013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17014 Document ! Settings
17024 There are six choices:
17027 \begin_layout Labeling
17028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17051 \begin_layout Labeling
17052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17055 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17059 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17064 Use quotes like ”this”
17067 \begin_layout Labeling
17068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17071 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17075 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17081 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17085 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17091 \begin_layout Labeling
17092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17095 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17099 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17105 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17109 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17115 \begin_layout Labeling
17116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17119 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17123 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17129 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17133 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17139 \begin_layout Labeling
17140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17143 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17147 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17153 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17157 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17163 \begin_layout Standard
17164 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17167 arg "quote-insert single"
17173 \begin_layout Subsection
17175 \begin_inset Index idx
17178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17179 Typography ! Ligatures
17185 \begin_inset Index idx
17188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17219 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17226 \begin_layout Standard
17227 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17228 print them as single characters.
17229 These groups are known as
17234 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17235 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17237 Here are the standard ligatures:
17240 \begin_layout Itemize
17244 \begin_layout Itemize
17248 \begin_layout Itemize
17252 \begin_layout Itemize
17256 \begin_layout Itemize
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17261 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17264 \begin_layout Standard
17265 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17266 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17274 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17290 To break a ligature, use
17292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17293 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17295 \begin_inset space ~
17302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17313 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17330 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17338 \begin_layout Subsection
17340 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17342 \begin_inset Index idx
17345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17355 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17362 \begin_layout Standard
17365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17366 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17370 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17373 \begin_layout Description
17375 The name of the game.
17378 \begin_layout Description
17380 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17384 \begin_layout Description
17386 The \SpecialChar TeX
17387 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17391 \begin_layout Description
17392 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17393 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17397 \begin_layout Standard
17398 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17404 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17412 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17413 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17414 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17415 converges to the number
17416 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17419 : The actual version is
17420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17428 , the previous one was
17429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17440 \begin_layout Subsection
17442 \begin_inset Index idx
17445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17454 \begin_layout Standard
17455 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17456 space between two words.
17457 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17467 for units use the menu
17469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17470 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17472 \begin_inset space ~
17480 arg "space-insert thin"
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 Here is an example to show the differences:
17490 \begin_layout Standard
17491 \begin_inset Tabular
17492 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17493 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17494 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17495 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17502 \begin_inset space ~
17506 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17518 space between number and unit
17525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17534 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17546 half space between number and unit
17559 \begin_layout Subsection
17561 \begin_inset Index idx
17564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17565 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17573 \begin_layout Standard
17574 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17576 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17577 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17578 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17579 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17580 These bits of text became known as
17591 \begin_layout Standard
17592 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17593 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17594 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17595 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17596 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17597 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17598 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17599 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17600 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17601 \begin_inset Newline newline
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17617 \begin_inset Newline newline
17620 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17621 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17622 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17624 \begin_inset space ~
17628 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17630 key "latexcompanion"
17635 \begin_inset space ~
17639 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17645 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17646 's page break mechanism.
17649 \begin_layout Chapter
17650 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17653 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17660 \begin_layout Standard
17661 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17664 \begin_inset space ~
17670 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17673 \begin_layout Section
17675 \begin_inset Index idx
17678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17694 \begin_layout Standard
17696 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17699 \begin_layout Description
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17705 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17706 \begin_inset Newline newline
17710 \begin_inset Note Note
17713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17714 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17722 \begin_layout Description
17723 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17724 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17725 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17728 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17729 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17731 \begin_inset space ~
17737 \begin_inset Newline newline
17741 \begin_inset Note Comment
17744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17745 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17754 \begin_layout Description
17756 \begin_inset space ~
17759 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17760 set in the document settings under
17762 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17764 \begin_inset space ~
17770 \begin_inset Newline newline
17774 \begin_inset Newline newline
17778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17787 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17788 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17793 of a comment that appears in the output.
17799 \begin_inset Newline newline
17803 \begin_inset Newline newline
17806 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17809 \begin_layout Standard
17810 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17818 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17822 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17825 \begin_layout Section
17827 \begin_inset Index idx
17830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17839 name "sec:Footnotes"
17846 \begin_layout Standard
17848 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17854 or the toolbar button
17857 arg "footnote-insert"
17869 \begin_inset Graphics
17870 filename clipart/footnote.png
17879 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17880 's representation of your footnote.
17890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17909 label, the box will
17913 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17914 Clicking on the box label again will close
17927 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17928 and click on the footnote
17943 \begin_layout Standard
17944 Here is an example footnote:
17952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17953 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17962 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17963 position where the footnote box is placed.
17964 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17965 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17966 according to the document class.
17968 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17969 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17975 ey are described in the
17978 \begin_inset space ~
17986 \begin_layout Section
17988 \begin_inset Index idx
17991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18000 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18007 \begin_layout Standard
18008 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18010 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18019 or the toolbar button
18022 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18048 appearing within your text.
18049 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18050 's representation of your margin
18059 \begin_layout Standard
18060 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18064 \begin_inset Marginal
18067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18069 This is a marginal note.
18077 \begin_layout Standard
18078 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18079 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18080 pages, right on odd pages.
18083 \begin_layout Standard
18084 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_inset space ~
18103 \begin_layout Section
18104 Graphics and Images
18105 \begin_inset Index idx
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 \begin_inset Index idx
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18127 name "sec:Graphics"
18134 \begin_layout Standard
18135 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18136 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18139 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18148 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18151 \begin_layout Standard
18152 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18157 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18158 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18160 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18161 \begin_inset space ~
18165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18167 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18174 \begin_layout Standard
18179 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18180 of the image in the output.
18181 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18185 \begin_inset space ~
18189 \begin_inset space ~
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18202 \begin_inset space ~
18206 \begin_inset space ~
18211 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18212 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18220 \begin_layout Standard
18224 \begin_inset space ~
18228 \begin_inset space ~
18233 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18234 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18236 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18241 \begin_inset space ~
18246 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18247 with the image size is printed.
18250 \begin_layout Standard
18251 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18252 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18254 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18257 \begin_layout Standard
18259 \begin_inset Graphics
18260 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18268 \begin_layout Standard
18269 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18270 the image into a float, see section
18271 \begin_inset space ~
18275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18277 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18284 \begin_layout Subsection
18286 \begin_inset Index idx
18289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18298 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18305 \begin_layout Standard
18306 You can insert images in any known file format.
18307 But as we explained in section
18308 \begin_inset space ~
18312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18314 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18318 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18320 therefore uses the program
18324 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18325 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18326 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18327 \begin_inset space ~
18331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18333 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18340 \begin_layout Standard
18341 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18344 \begin_layout Description
18346 \begin_inset space ~
18349 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18350 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18351 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18355 Graphics Interchange Format
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18359 (GIF, file extension
18360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18372 \begin_inset Index idx
18375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18407 Portable Network Graphics
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18411 (PNG, file extension
18412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18424 \begin_inset Index idx
18427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18459 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18463 (JPG, file extension
18464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18488 \begin_inset Index idx
18491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18522 \begin_layout Description
18524 \begin_inset space ~
18527 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18529 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18530 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18531 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18532 \begin_inset Newline newline
18535 Scalable image formats can be
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18539 Scalable Vector Graphics
18540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18543 (SVG, file extension
18544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18556 \begin_inset Index idx
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18591 Encapsulated PostScript
18592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18595 (EPS, file extension
18596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18608 \begin_inset Index idx
18611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18643 Portable Document Format
18644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18647 (PDF, file extension
18648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18660 \begin_inset Index idx
18663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18678 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18679 result will not be scalable.
18680 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18686 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18694 \begin_layout Standard
18695 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18702 \begin_layout Subsection
18703 Grouping of Image Settings
18704 \begin_inset Index idx
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18708 Images ! Settings grouping
18716 \begin_layout Standard
18717 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18719 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18720 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18722 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18723 need to manually change each of them.
18727 \begin_layout Standard
18728 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_inset space ~
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18757 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18758 and checking the name of the desired group.
18761 \begin_layout Section
18763 \begin_inset Index idx
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18782 \begin_layout Standard
18783 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18786 arg "tabular-insert"
18791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18795 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18796 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18797 from the rest of the table.
18798 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18799 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18801 Here is an example table:
18804 \begin_layout Standard
18806 \begin_inset Tabular
18807 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18808 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18812 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19012 \begin_layout Subsection
19016 \begin_layout Standard
19017 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19020 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19024 This brings up the table dialog.
19025 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19026 cursor is placed currently.
19027 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19028 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19029 done on all of your selection.
19032 \begin_layout Standard
19033 In addition to the table dialog, the
19036 \begin_inset space ~
19041 helps you in setting table properties.
19042 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19045 \begin_layout Standard
19049 \begin_inset space ~
19054 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19055 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19056 current cell respectively.
19057 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19059 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19060 of text, see section
19061 \begin_inset space ~
19065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19067 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19074 \begin_layout Standard
19075 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19076 using the check box
19085 This will merge the cells to
19089 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19090 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19091 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19092 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19093 in the last row without the upper border:
19096 \begin_layout Standard
19098 \begin_inset Tabular
19099 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19100 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19101 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19102 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19103 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19104 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19115 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19124 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19200 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 \begin_layout Standard
19236 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19237 -arguments for the table.
19238 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19239 explained in the chapter
19246 \begin_inset space ~
19252 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19253 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19254 but are visible in the output.
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19258 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 Most DVI-viewers are
19270 able to display rotations.
19278 \begin_layout Standard
19283 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19288 adds lines for all cell borders.
19291 \begin_layout Subsection
19293 \begin_inset Index idx
19296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 Tables ! Multi-page
19303 \begin_inset Index idx
19306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19315 \begin_layout Standard
19316 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19319 \begin_inset space ~
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19331 \begin_inset space ~
19336 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19337 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19340 \begin_layout Description
19345 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19346 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19347 Except for the first page, if
19350 \begin_inset space ~
19358 \begin_layout Description
19362 \begin_inset space ~
19367 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19368 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19371 \begin_layout Description
19376 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19377 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19378 except for the last page, if
19381 \begin_inset space ~
19389 \begin_layout Description
19393 \begin_inset space ~
19398 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19399 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19402 \begin_layout Description
19403 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19404 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19410 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19413 \begin_inset space ~
19421 \begin_layout Standard
19422 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19423 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19424 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19430 In this context, first means first in this order:
19433 \begin_inset space ~
19445 \begin_inset space ~
19450 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19453 \begin_layout Standard
19455 \begin_inset Tabular
19456 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19457 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19458 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19459 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19460 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19461 <row endfirsthead="true">
19462 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19468 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19473 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19482 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 <row endfirsthead="true">
19493 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19504 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19513 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 <row endhead="true">
19526 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19556 <row endhead="true">
19557 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19577 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 <row endfoot="true">
19590 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20600 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20611 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20673 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21571 <row endlastfoot="true">
21572 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21583 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 \begin_layout Subsection
21611 \begin_inset Index idx
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21623 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21630 \begin_layout Standard
21631 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21632 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21633 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21634 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21638 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21641 \begin_layout Standard
21642 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21643 for the column in the table dialog.
21644 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21645 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21649 \begin_layout Standard
21651 \begin_inset Tabular
21652 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21653 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21654 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21655 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21656 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21676 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 This is longer now.
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21858 This is longer now.
21863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 \begin_layout Standard
21890 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21891 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21897 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21903 Selection with the mouse or with
21907 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21908 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21909 the selection from outside the table.
21912 \begin_layout Section
21914 \begin_inset Index idx
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21933 \begin_layout Subsection
21937 \begin_layout Standard
21938 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21939 have a fixed location.
21941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21948 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21956 \begin_inset space ~
21961 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21962 too many notes on the current page.
21965 \begin_layout Standard
21966 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21967 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21968 and pages without text.
21969 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21970 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21971 Floats are therefore numbered.
21972 Referencing is described in section
21973 \begin_inset space ~
21977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21979 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21986 \begin_layout Standard
21987 To insert a float, use the menu
21989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21993 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21994 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21996 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21997 \begin_inset Index idx
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22006 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22007 paragraph within the float.
22008 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22009 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22010 left-clicking on the box label.
22011 A closed float box looks like this:
22012 \begin_inset Graphics
22013 filename clipart/float.png
22018 – a gray button with a red label.
22021 \begin_layout Standard
22022 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22024 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22027 \begin_layout Subsection
22029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22031 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22036 \begin_inset Index idx
22039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22040 Floats ! Figure floats
22048 \begin_layout Standard
22050 \begin_inset space ~
22054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22056 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22060 was created using the menu
22062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22063 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22069 arg "float-insert figure"
22073 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22082 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22086 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22087 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22089 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22091 \begin_inset space ~
22099 arg "layout-paragraph"
22105 \begin_layout Standard
22106 \begin_inset Float figure
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22113 \begin_inset Graphics
22114 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22129 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22133 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22146 \begin_layout Standard
22147 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22148 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22159 ) and refer to it using the menu
22161 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22167 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22171 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22172 vague references like
22173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22180 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22181 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22191 For more about cross-references, see section
22192 \begin_inset space ~
22196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22198 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22205 \begin_layout Standard
22206 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22207 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22208 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22209 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22210 as described in section
22211 \begin_inset space ~
22215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22217 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22223 \begin_inset space ~
22227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22229 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22233 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22234 You can also set the images one below the other.
22236 \begin_inset space ~
22240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22242 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22249 reference "fig:Platypus"
22253 are the subfigures.
22256 \begin_layout Standard
22257 \begin_inset Float figure
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22267 \begin_inset Float figure
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22278 name "fig:Undefinable"
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 \begin_inset Graphics
22292 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22303 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22307 \begin_inset Float figure
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22318 name "fig:Platypus"
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 \begin_inset Graphics
22332 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22344 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22356 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22360 Two distorted images.
22373 \begin_layout Subsection
22375 \begin_inset Index idx
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 Floats ! Table floats
22387 \begin_layout Standard
22388 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22391 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22394 or the toolbar button
22397 arg "float-insert table"
22401 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22402 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22403 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22405 \begin_inset space ~
22409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22411 reference "tab:Table-float"
22418 \begin_layout Standard
22419 \begin_inset Float table
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22425 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22430 name "tab:Table-float"
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22444 \begin_inset Tabular
22445 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22446 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22448 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22449 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22576 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22600 \end{array}\right]$
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22642 \begin_layout Subsection
22644 \begin_inset Index idx
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 \begin_layout Standard
22658 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22659 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22660 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22662 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22670 \begin_inset space ~
22678 \begin_layout Section
22680 \begin_inset Index idx
22683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 \begin_layout Standard
22694 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22696 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22697 \begin_inset space \space{}
22704 \begin_layout Standard
22705 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22706 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22712 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22713 and its alignment within the page.
22716 \begin_layout Standard
22718 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22728 height_special "totalheight"
22733 backgroundcolor "none"
22736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 This is a minipage.
22740 The text is set in an italic style.
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22746 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22747 another formatting.
22755 \begin_layout Standard
22756 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22759 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22763 as described in section
22764 \begin_inset space ~
22768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22770 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22775 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22781 \begin_layout Standard
22782 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22792 height_special "totalheight"
22797 backgroundcolor "none"
22800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22802 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22808 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22812 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22822 height_special "totalheight"
22827 backgroundcolor "none"
22830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22831 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22832 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22840 \begin_layout Standard
22841 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22847 \begin_layout Standard
22848 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22850 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22857 \begin_inset space ~
22865 \begin_layout Chapter
22866 Mathematical Formulas
22867 \begin_inset Index idx
22870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 \begin_inset Index idx
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22911 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22918 \begin_layout Standard
22919 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22924 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22927 \begin_layout Section
22929 \begin_inset Index idx
22932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22941 \begin_layout Standard
22942 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22955 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22957 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22958 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22959 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22967 \begin_layout Standard
22968 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22972 \begin_inset space ~
22977 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22980 \begin_layout Standard
22981 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22982 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22985 \begin_layout Standard
22986 This is a line with an inline formula
22987 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22993 \begin_layout Standard
22994 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22995 paragraph, like this one:
22996 \begin_inset Formula
23003 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23006 \begin_layout Standard
23008 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23010 For example, typing
23011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23024 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23025 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23029 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23032 \begin_inset space ~
23040 \begin_layout Subsection
23041 Navigating in Formulas
23042 \begin_inset Index idx
23045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23054 \begin_layout Standard
23055 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23056 achieved with the arrow keys.
23058 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23059 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23064 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23065 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23069 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23073 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23076 \end{array}\right]$
23084 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23089 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23090 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23093 \begin_layout Standard
23098 , printed in this document as
23099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23103 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23110 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23111 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23112 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23117 For example, if you want
23118 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23126 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23136 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23140 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23145 , since in the latter case only the
23148 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23153 will be under the square root sign:
23154 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23160 \begin_layout Standard
23161 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23163 \begin_inset Formula
23165 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23174 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23175 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23178 \begin_layout Subsection
23182 \begin_layout Standard
23183 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23184 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23188 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23189 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23190 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23191 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23192 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23196 \begin_layout Subsection
23197 Exponents and Subscripts
23198 \begin_inset Index idx
23201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23208 \begin_inset Index idx
23211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23220 \begin_layout Standard
23221 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23224 arg "math-superscript"
23230 arg "math-subscript"
23233 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23235 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23238 , type in a formula
23241 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23251 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23257 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23261 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23267 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23273 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23282 , you have to use an extra
23286 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23287 For example, if you want
23288 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23294 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23300 Subscripts are similar: To get
23301 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23307 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23315 \begin_layout Subsection
23317 \begin_inset Index idx
23320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23329 \begin_layout Standard
23330 Create a fraction either with the command
23336 or by using the icon
23339 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23345 \begin_inset space ~
23351 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23352 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23353 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23358 To move back up, press
23363 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23364 \begin_inset Formula
23366 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23369 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23377 \begin_layout Subsection
23379 \begin_inset Index idx
23382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23391 \begin_layout Standard
23392 Roots can be created using the
23395 \begin_inset space ~
23403 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23409 arg "math-insert \\root"
23431 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23437 always produces a square root.
23440 \begin_layout Subsection
23441 Operators with Limits
23442 \begin_inset Index idx
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 \begin_inset Index idx
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23464 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23471 \begin_layout Standard
23473 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23477 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23480 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23481 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23482 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23483 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23484 The sum operator will automatically place its
23485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23492 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23494 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23498 \begin_inset Formula
23500 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23505 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23509 \begin_layout Standard
23510 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23512 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23513 behind the operator and using the menu
23515 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23516 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23518 \begin_inset space ~
23522 \begin_inset space ~
23536 \begin_layout Standard
23537 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23546 \begin_inset Index idx
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 \begin_inset Formula
23558 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23563 which will place the
23564 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23576 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23577 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23583 \begin_layout Standard
23584 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23591 Have a look at section
23592 \begin_inset space ~
23596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23598 reference "subsec:Functions"
23602 for an explanation of function macros.
23605 \begin_layout Subsection
23607 \begin_inset Index idx
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 \begin_layout Standard
23620 Most math symbols can be found in the
23623 \begin_inset space ~
23628 under one of several categories; including
23645 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23649 \begin_layout Standard
23650 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23651 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23652 don't have to use the
23655 \begin_inset space ~
23660 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23662 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23665 \begin_layout Subsection
23667 \begin_inset Index idx
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 \begin_layout Standard
23680 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23686 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23692 \begin_inset space ~
23700 arg "math-insert \\space"
23704 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23705 For example, the sequence
23710 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23713 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23715 \begin_inset Graphics
23716 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23721 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23722 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23723 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23724 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23725 , because they are negative
23727 Here are two examples:
23730 \begin_layout Standard
23740 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23746 \begin_layout Standard
23756 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23762 \begin_layout Subsection
23764 \begin_inset Index idx
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23776 name "subsec:Functions"
23783 \begin_layout Standard
23787 \begin_inset space ~
23792 contains under the button
23795 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23798 a number of function macros, such as
23799 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23803 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23811 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23818 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23819 avoid confusions, because
23820 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23824 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23830 \begin_layout Standard
23831 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23833 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23837 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23843 \begin_layout Standard
23844 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23845 are placed, as described in section
23846 \begin_inset space ~
23850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23852 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23859 \begin_layout Subsection
23861 \begin_inset Index idx
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23873 \begin_layout Standard
23874 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23876 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23877 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23878 commands, for example, to enter
23879 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23882 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23883 Our example is entered by typing
23888 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23895 \begin_inset space ~
23899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23901 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23905 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23908 \begin_layout Standard
23909 \begin_inset Float table
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23920 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23924 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 \begin_inset Tabular
23935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24023 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24077 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24185 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24347 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24401 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24500 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24521 \begin_layout Standard
24522 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24525 \begin_inset space ~
24533 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24536 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24540 \begin_layout Section
24541 Brackets and Delimiters
24542 \begin_inset Index idx
24545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 \begin_inset Index idx
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24564 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24571 \begin_layout Standard
24572 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24574 For some purposes, using just the keys
24579 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24580 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24581 toolbar delimiter icon
24584 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24588 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24589 \begin_inset Formula
24591 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24599 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24600 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24604 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24607 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24613 \begin_inset Formula
24615 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24623 \begin_layout Standard
24624 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24625 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24629 \begin_layout Standard
24630 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24631 left side and right side.
24632 If you use the option
24635 \begin_inset space ~
24640 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24641 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24643 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24648 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24649 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24652 \begin_layout Standard
24653 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24654 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24655 is to go inside the brackets.
24656 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24661 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24662 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24663 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24667 arg "math-delim ( )"
24673 \begin_layout Section
24674 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24675 \begin_inset Index idx
24678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24685 \begin_inset Index idx
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24695 \begin_inset Index idx
24698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24707 \begin_layout Standard
24708 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24712 \begin_inset space ~
24720 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24724 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24725 Here is an example:
24726 \begin_inset Formula
24728 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24737 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24738 \begin_inset space ~
24742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24744 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24749 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24750 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24751 This alignment is set in the box
24756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24805 for every column as default.
24806 For example, the sequence
24807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24818 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24819 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24820 corresponds to the relevant column.
24821 The result will look like this:
24822 \begin_inset Formula
24825 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24826 column & has & has\,right\\
24827 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24836 \begin_layout Standard
24837 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24840 arg "newline-insert newline"
24843 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24844 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24846 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24849 or the math toolbar.
24852 \begin_layout Standard
24853 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24854 It can be created with the menu
24856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24857 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24859 \begin_inset space ~
24871 Here is an example:
24872 \begin_inset Formula
24886 \begin_layout Standard
24887 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24890 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24893 arg "newline-insert newline"
24897 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24902 arg "newline-insert newline"
24905 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24913 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24914 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24915 A new row is created by every further entry of
24918 arg "newline-insert newline"
24922 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24923 Here is an example:
24924 \begin_inset Formula
24926 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24927 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24932 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24933 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24934 \begin_inset Formula
24936 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24944 \begin_layout Standard
24945 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24952 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24953 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24956 reference "eq:asquared"
24961 The other types are described in section
24962 \begin_inset space ~
24966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24968 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24975 \begin_layout Section
24976 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24977 \begin_inset Index idx
24980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24981 Math ! Formula numbering
24987 \begin_inset Index idx
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24991 Math ! Referencing formulas
24997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24999 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25006 \begin_layout Standard
25007 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25009 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25010 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25012 \begin_inset space ~
25016 \begin_inset space ~
25024 arg "math-number-toggle"
25028 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25029 within parentheses.
25030 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25031 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25032 the document class.
25033 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25034 separated by a dot:
25035 \begin_inset Formula
25045 arg "math-number-toggle"
25048 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25049 You can only number displayed formulas.
25052 \begin_layout Standard
25053 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25055 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25056 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25058 \begin_inset space ~
25062 \begin_inset space ~
25070 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25073 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25074 \begin_inset Formula
25077 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25083 To number all lines use the shortcut
25086 arg "math-number-toggle"
25092 \begin_layout Standard
25093 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25096 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25097 A label is inserted with the menu
25099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25108 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25109 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25110 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25122 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25123 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25124 We inserted in the following example the label
25125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25132 in the second line:
25133 \begin_inset Formula
25135 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25136 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25141 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25142 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25143 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25147 \begin_inset space ~
25155 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25159 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25160 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25161 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25162 as the formula number:
25165 \begin_layout Standard
25166 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25169 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25176 \begin_layout Standard
25177 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25178 's cross-reference box are described in section
25179 \begin_inset space ~
25183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25185 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25190 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25198 \begin_layout Section
25199 User defined math macros
25200 \begin_inset Index idx
25203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 \begin_layout Standard
25214 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25215 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25216 Math macros are explained in section
25219 \begin_inset space ~
25231 \begin_layout Section
25235 \begin_layout Subsection
25237 \begin_inset Index idx
25240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 \begin_layout Standard
25250 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25251 To set a font in a formula, use the
25254 \begin_inset space ~
25262 arg "math-insert \\font"
25265 , or enter its command, listed in table
25266 \begin_inset space ~
25270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25272 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25279 \begin_layout Standard
25280 \begin_inset Float table
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25291 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25295 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 \begin_inset Tabular
25306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25307 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25341 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25368 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25395 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25428 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25455 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25543 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25577 \begin_layout Standard
25578 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25586 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25602 \begin_layout Standard
25603 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25604 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25609 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25610 space when you need a space in the box.
25611 Here is an example where
25612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25623 denotes the set of numbers:
25624 \begin_inset Formula
25626 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25634 \begin_layout Standard
25635 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25636 You can, for example, put a character in
25645 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25649 \begin_inset Newline newline
25652 So it is better not to use this feature.
25655 \begin_layout Standard
25656 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25657 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25661 \begin_inset Newline newline
25664 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25670 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25671 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25677 \begin_layout Standard
25684 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25687 \begin_layout Standard
25688 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25690 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25691 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25693 \begin_inset space ~
25701 \begin_layout Subsection
25703 \begin_inset Index idx
25706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25715 \begin_layout Standard
25716 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25718 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25722 \begin_inset space ~
25726 \begin_inset space ~
25734 \begin_inset space ~
25742 arg "math-insert \\font"
25746 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25747 in black instead of blue.
25748 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25749 Here is an example:
25750 \begin_inset Formula
25753 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25754 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25763 \begin_layout Subsection
25765 \begin_inset Index idx
25768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25777 \begin_layout Standard
25778 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25779 automatically chosen in most situations.
25797 For most characters,
25805 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25806 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25811 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25812 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25813 thinks are appropriate.
25814 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25817 arg "math-insert \\style"
25821 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25822 For example, you can set
25823 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25826 , which is normally in
25835 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25839 The four styles are used in the following example:
25842 \begin_layout Standard
25843 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25847 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25851 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25855 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25861 \begin_layout Standard
25862 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25863 is set in a particular size with the menu
25865 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25867 \begin_inset space ~
25872 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25873 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25874 will be adjusted to correspond.
25875 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25886 \begin_layout Standard
25890 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25896 \begin_layout Section
25897 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25899 \begin_inset Index idx
25902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25909 \begin_inset Index idx
25912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 \begin_layout Standard
25923 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25924 that are in common use.
25927 \begin_layout Subsection
25928 Enabling AMS-Support
25931 \begin_layout Standard
25932 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25933 the document by selecting the checkbox
25936 \begin_inset space ~
25940 \begin_inset space ~
25944 \begin_inset space ~
25951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25955 \begin_inset Index idx
25958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25959 Document ! Settings
25967 \begin_inset space ~
25973 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25974 -errors in formulas,
25975 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25978 \begin_layout Subsection
25980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25982 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25987 \begin_inset Index idx
25990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25991 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25999 \begin_layout Standard
26000 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26001 provides a selection of different formula types.
26003 allows you to choose between
26024 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26025 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26031 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26034 \begin_layout Chapter
26038 \begin_layout Section
26040 \begin_inset Index idx
26043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26052 name "sec:Cross-References"
26059 \begin_layout Standard
26060 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26061 's strengths is cross-references.
26062 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26064 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26065 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26066 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26069 \begin_layout Enumerate
26073 \begin_layout Enumerate
26074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26076 name "enu:Second-item"
26083 \begin_layout Enumerate
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26088 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26093 or by pressing the toolbar button
26100 A gray label box like this:
26101 \begin_inset Graphics
26102 filename clipart/label.png
26106 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26108 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26143 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26144 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26160 \begin_layout Standard
26161 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26163 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26166 or the toolbar button
26169 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26173 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26174 \begin_inset Graphics
26175 filename clipart/reference.png
26179 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26181 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26194 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26198 \begin_layout Standard
26199 As an alternative to
26201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26204 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26209 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26210 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26212 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26224 \begin_layout Standard
26225 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26226 \begin_inset space ~
26230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26232 reference "enu:Second-item"
26239 \begin_layout Standard
26240 It is recommended to use a protected space
26244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26245 described in section
26246 \begin_inset space ~
26250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26252 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26261 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26262 line breaks between them.
26265 \begin_layout Standard
26266 There are six formats of cross-references:
26269 \begin_layout Description
26270 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26273 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26280 \begin_layout Description
26281 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26282 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26294 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26301 \begin_layout Description
26302 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26303 \begin_inset space ~
26307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26308 LatexCommand pageref
26309 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26316 \begin_layout Description
26318 \begin_inset space ~
26322 \begin_inset space ~
26325 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26327 LatexCommand vpageref
26328 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26333 \begin_inset Newline newline
26336 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26337 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26338 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26339 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26340 it prints “on the next page”.
26341 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26344 \begin_layout Description
26346 \begin_inset space ~
26350 \begin_inset space ~
26354 \begin_inset space ~
26357 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26360 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26365 \begin_inset Newline newline
26368 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26374 ; otherwise it behaves like
26378 \begin_inset space ~
26382 \begin_inset space ~
26391 \begin_layout Description
26393 \begin_inset space ~
26396 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26397 \begin_inset Newline newline
26401 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26409 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26419 \begin_inset Index idx
26422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 -packages ! prettyref
26430 \begin_inset Index idx
26433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26435 -packages ! refstyle
26446 \begin_inset Newline newline
26449 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26450 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26453 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26458 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26466 is the default and preferred because
26470 supports only English documents.
26471 The format is specified by using the command
26483 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26484 preamble of the document.
26485 For example, if you are using
26489 , then redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
26491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26502 ) can be done with this command
26503 \begin_inset Newline newline
26510 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26515 \begin_inset Newline newline
26518 Please note that neither
26526 (nor LyX itself) defines reference formats for all available types.
26527 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
26529 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
26530 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
26535 , you might do so as follows:
26536 \begin_inset Newline newline
26543 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
26548 \begin_inset Newline newline
26551 For more information about the defining formatted references, have a look
26552 at the package documentations,
26553 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26555 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26562 \begin_layout Description
26564 \begin_inset space ~
26567 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26569 LatexCommand nameref
26570 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26577 \begin_layout Standard
26578 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26579 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26581 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26585 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26589 \begin_layout Standard
26590 You can only use the style
26594 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26598 is always possible.
26601 \begin_layout Standard
26602 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26603 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26605 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26606 \begin_inset space ~
26610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26612 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26619 \begin_layout Standard
26620 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26624 \begin_inset space ~
26628 \begin_inset space ~
26633 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26634 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26637 \begin_inset space ~
26642 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26643 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26646 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26652 \begin_layout Standard
26653 You can change labels at any time.
26654 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26655 do not need to think about this.
26658 \begin_layout Standard
26659 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26661 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26665 \begin_layout Standard
26666 References are described in detail in the section
26667 \begin_inset space ~
26677 \begin_inset space ~
26685 \begin_layout Section
26686 Table of Contents and other Listings
26687 \begin_inset Index idx
26690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26697 \begin_inset Index idx
26700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26701 Navigating ! Outline
26707 \begin_inset Index idx
26710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26726 \begin_layout Subsection
26728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26730 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26737 \begin_layout Standard
26738 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26740 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26741 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26743 \begin_inset space ~
26747 \begin_inset space ~
26753 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26755 If you click on it, the
26759 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26760 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26761 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26763 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26765 \begin_inset space ~
26770 that is described in section
26771 \begin_inset space ~
26775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26777 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26784 \begin_layout Standard
26785 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26786 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26788 \begin_inset space ~
26792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26794 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26798 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26800 \begin_inset space ~
26804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26806 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26810 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26812 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26815 \begin_layout Subsection
26816 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26819 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26826 \begin_layout Standard
26827 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26829 You can insert them via the
26831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26835 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26838 \begin_layout Section
26839 URLs and Hyperlinks
26840 \begin_inset Index idx
26843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26850 \begin_inset Index idx
26853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26862 \begin_layout Subsection
26864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26873 \begin_layout Standard
26874 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26882 \begin_layout Standard
26883 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26885 \begin_inset Flex URL
26888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26898 \begin_layout Standard
26899 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26905 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26909 \begin_layout Standard
26910 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26918 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26927 \begin_layout Subsection
26929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26931 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26938 \begin_layout Standard
26939 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26944 or with the toolbar button
26951 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26960 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26961 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26964 name "LyX's homepage"
26965 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26969 , an Email address like this:
26970 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26972 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26973 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26978 , or a link to a file.
26981 \begin_layout Standard
26982 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26995 to the link target.
26998 \begin_layout Standard
26999 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27000 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27001 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27002 the text style dialog.
27003 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27007 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27009 name "LyX's homepage"
27010 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27017 \begin_layout Standard
27018 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27022 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27025 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27029 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27031 \begin_inset Newline newline
27039 \begin_inset Newline newline
27046 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27049 \begin_layout Section
27051 \begin_inset Index idx
27054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27063 name "sec:Appendices"
27070 \begin_layout Standard
27071 Appendices are created with the menu
27073 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27075 \begin_inset space ~
27079 \begin_inset space ~
27085 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27086 as the appendix part of the book.
27087 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27090 \begin_layout Standard
27091 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27092 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27093 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27094 and the subsection number.
27095 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27099 \begin_layout Standard
27101 \begin_inset space ~
27105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27107 reference "chap:Credits"
27112 \begin_inset space ~
27116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27118 reference "subsec:Export"
27125 \begin_layout Section
27127 \begin_inset Index idx
27130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27139 name "sec:Bibliography"
27146 \begin_layout Standard
27147 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27149 You can include a bibliography database,
27153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27154 Known under the name
27155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27158 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27168 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27169 manually, using the paragraph environment
27173 , which was described in section
27174 \begin_inset space ~
27178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27180 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27185 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27186 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27190 use a bibliography database.
27193 \begin_layout Subsection
27194 The Bibliography Environment
27197 \begin_layout Standard
27202 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27204 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27213 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27215 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27225 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27228 \begin_layout Standard
27229 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27234 or the toolbar button
27237 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27241 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27242 containing the available citations.
27243 Select one or more keys from the list and
27253 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27254 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27258 \begin_layout Standard
27259 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27260 entry with surrounding brackets.
27265 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27266 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27278 \begin_layout Standard
27282 Companion Second Edition
27285 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27287 key "latexcompanion"
27294 \begin_layout Standard
27295 The \SpecialChar LyX
27296 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27297 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27306 \begin_layout Standard
27307 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27310 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27312 \begin_inset space ~
27320 arg "layout-paragraph"
27324 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27327 \begin_layout Subsection
27328 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27330 \begin_inset Index idx
27333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27334 Bibliography ! Databases
27340 \begin_inset Index idx
27343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27344 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27353 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27360 \begin_layout Standard
27361 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27367 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27369 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27370 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27375 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27377 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27378 your working field in a database.
27379 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27380 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27381 list for that document.
27382 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27386 \begin_layout Standard
27387 The database is a text file with the file extension
27388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27399 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27400 The format is explained in
27401 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27407 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27409 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27411 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27416 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27417 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27418 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27420 \begin_inset Flex URL
27423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27425 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27433 \begin_layout Standard
27434 To use a database, use the menu
27436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27441 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27443 \begin_inset space ~
27449 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27450 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27457 Add bibliography to TOC
27459 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27464 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27465 in the document or just the cited references.
27468 \begin_layout Standard
27469 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27481 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27482 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27483 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27484 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27486 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27492 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27493 \begin_inset Newline newline
27497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27499 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27511 \begin_layout Standard
27512 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27515 \begin_layout Standard
27516 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27517 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27519 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27527 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27532 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27533 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27534 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27538 The following variants are possible:
27541 \begin_layout Description
27542 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27543 with other bibliography packages (e.
27544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27548 \begin_inset space \space{}
27555 ), only with the package
27559 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27563 \begin_layout Description
27564 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27565 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27566 with all bibliography packages, except
27571 \begin_layout Description
27572 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27577 , works with all bibliography packages
27580 \begin_layout Standard
27581 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27582 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27584 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27587 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27591 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27600 \begin_layout Standard
27601 When you select the option
27603 Sectioned bibliography
27607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27608 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27611 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27612 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27614 Customizing Bibliographies
27618 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27623 Additional Features
27628 \begin_layout Standard
27629 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27630 the two methods of creating them.
27631 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27632 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27633 We used the style file
27637 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27640 \begin_layout Subsection
27642 \begin_inset Index idx
27645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27646 Bibliography ! Citation format
27654 \begin_layout Standard
27655 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27656 For this feature you need to enable the option
27662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27666 \begin_inset Index idx
27669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27670 Document ! Settings
27680 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27681 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27682 style files as explained in
27683 the previous section.
27686 \begin_layout Standard
27687 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27688 the citation reference window.
27689 Here is an example where the text
27690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27694 \begin_inset space ~
27698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27701 appears after the reference:
27704 \begin_layout Standard
27706 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27709 key "latexcompanion"
27716 \begin_layout Section
27718 \begin_inset Index idx
27721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27737 \begin_layout Standard
27738 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27740 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27742 \begin_inset space ~
27747 or the toolbar button
27754 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27755 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27756 by \SpecialChar LyX
27757 as the index entry.
27760 \begin_layout Standard
27761 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27763 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27764 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27766 \begin_inset space ~
27772 A light blue box labeled
27773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27784 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27785 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27789 \begin_layout Standard
27790 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27791 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27792 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27793 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27797 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27804 \begin_layout Subsection
27805 Grouping Index Entries
27806 \begin_inset Index idx
27809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27818 \begin_layout Standard
27819 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27821 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27822 lists under the entry
27823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27831 First we create the entry
27832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27840 \begin_inset space ~
27844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27846 reference "subsec:Lists"
27851 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27852 \begin_inset space ~
27856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27858 reference "sec:Itemize"
27862 , we insert the command
27865 \begin_layout Standard
27871 \begin_layout Standard
27875 \begin_layout Standard
27881 \begin_layout Standard
27882 for the enumerated list in section
27883 \begin_inset space ~
27887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27889 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27897 The exclamation mark
27898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27905 marks the grouping levels.
27906 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27907 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27908 If we don't have an index entry for
27909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27916 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27919 \begin_layout Subsection
27921 \begin_inset Index idx
27924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27925 Index ! Page ranges
27933 \begin_layout Standard
27934 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27936 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27937 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27938 an index entry in section
27939 \begin_inset space ~
27943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27945 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27952 \begin_layout Standard
27955 Paragraph environments|(
27958 \begin_layout Standard
27959 and another entry at the end of section
27960 \begin_inset space ~
27964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27966 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27973 \begin_layout Standard
27976 Paragraph environments|)
27979 \begin_layout Standard
27981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28004 respectively start and end the index range.
28005 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28006 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28007 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28008 An example is the index entry
28009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28012 Document ! Settings
28013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28019 \begin_layout Subsection
28021 \begin_inset Index idx
28024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28025 Index ! Cross referencing
28033 \begin_layout Standard
28034 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28035 We referred for example in the index entry
28036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28044 \begin_inset space ~
28048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28050 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28054 ) to the index entry
28055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28062 in the same section using the entry
28065 \begin_layout Standard
28068 GIF|see{Image formats}
28071 \begin_layout Standard
28072 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28074 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28075 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28078 \begin_layout Subsection
28080 \begin_inset Index idx
28083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28084 Index ! Entry order
28092 \begin_layout Standard
28093 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28094 follow the rules for the index order.
28095 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28101 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28103 \begin_inset space ~
28107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28109 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28118 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28119 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28144 \begin_inset Index idx
28147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28148 Dummy entries ! maïs
28154 \begin_inset Index idx
28157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28158 Dummy entries ! maître
28164 \begin_inset Index idx
28167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28168 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28173 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28174 maïs, maison, maître.
28175 To achieve this, we use the command
28178 \begin_layout Standard
28181 previous entry@current entry
28184 \begin_layout Standard
28185 In our case we want to have
28186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28201 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28204 \begin_layout Standard
28210 \begin_layout Standard
28211 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28212 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28214 See the next subsection for an example.
28217 \begin_layout Standard
28218 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28224 \begin_layout Standard
28225 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28230 to generate the index (see section
28231 \begin_inset space ~
28235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28237 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28246 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28247 -package aeguill in section
28248 \begin_inset space ~
28252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28254 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28258 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28259 -packages although all these index
28260 commands start with
28261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28274 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28279 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28282 \begin_layout Standard
28294 \begin_layout Standard
28306 \begin_layout Subsection
28308 \begin_inset Index idx
28311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28312 Index ! Entry layout
28320 \begin_layout Standard
28321 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28322 \begin_inset Index idx
28325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28328 This is an italic dummy entry
28333 You can also format the page number using the character
28334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28341 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28342 -command without a backslash.
28343 We can write for example
28346 \begin_layout Standard
28349 italic page number:|textit
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28353 to get the page number in italic.
28354 \begin_inset Index idx
28357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28358 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28363 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28364 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28382 \begin_inset space ~
28388 Have a look at section
28389 \begin_inset space ~
28393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28395 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28399 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28403 \begin_layout Standard
28404 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28412 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28416 to generate the index, see section
28417 \begin_inset space ~
28421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28423 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28432 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28437 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28438 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28441 key "latexcompanion"
28453 \begin_layout Standard
28454 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28456 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28457 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28458 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28459 If so, put the following in the preamble
28462 \begin_layout Standard
28474 \begin_layout Standard
28478 \begin_layout Standard
28484 \begin_layout Standard
28485 in the index entry.
28486 \begin_inset Index idx
28489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28490 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28495 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28496 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28497 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28500 \begin_layout Standard
28501 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28502 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28503 a bold font for all index entries.
28504 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28516 documentation for details,
28517 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28519 key "makeindex,xindy"
28526 \begin_layout Subsection
28528 \begin_inset Index idx
28531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28540 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28547 \begin_layout Standard
28548 If the index generation program
28552 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28553 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28557 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28558 distribution, is used.
28562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28567 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28568 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28569 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28570 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28571 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28581 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28583 dialog, see section
28584 \begin_inset space ~
28588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28590 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28595 The available options are listed and explained in
28596 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28598 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28603 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28607 \begin_layout Standard
28608 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28609 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28613 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28617 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28618 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28621 \begin_layout Subsection
28625 \begin_layout Standard
28626 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28627 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28635 next to the standard index.
28637 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28638 that add this feature.
28645 \begin_inset Index idx
28648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28650 -packages ! splitidx
28655 package to generate multiple indexes.
28656 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28662 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28671 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28672 style, but it also includes
28673 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28674 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28682 \begin_layout Standard
28683 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28684 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28686 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28687 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28690 and select the option
28692 Use multiple Indexes
28699 already contains the standard index
28700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28708 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28709 also appear as a heading) to the
28713 input field and press the
28718 The new index now also appears in the list.
28719 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28720 label color to the new index.
28723 \begin_layout Standard
28724 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28734 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28735 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28736 are additional features:
28739 \begin_layout Itemize
28740 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28741 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28744 \begin_layout Itemize
28745 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28746 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28754 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28755 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28756 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28757 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28760 \begin_layout Section
28761 Nomenclature/Glossary
28762 \begin_inset Index idx
28765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28772 \begin_inset Index idx
28775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28806 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28813 \begin_layout Standard
28814 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28815 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28816 called nomenclature or glossary.
28819 \begin_layout Standard
28820 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28827 \begin_inset Index idx
28830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28832 -packages ! nomencl
28838 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28840 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28846 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28850 \begin_layout Standard
28851 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28852 and then use the menu
28854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28860 \begin_inset space ~
28865 or the toolbar button
28868 arg "nomencl-insert"
28873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28884 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28887 \begin_layout Standard
28888 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28889 The first is the term or
28893 that you wish to define.
28898 of the term or symbol.
28901 \begin_layout Standard
28902 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28910 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28911 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28919 \begin_layout Subsection
28920 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28921 \begin_inset Index idx
28924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28925 Nomenclature ! Layout
28933 \begin_layout Standard
28934 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28938 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28945 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28953 \begin_inset Newline newline
28961 \begin_inset Newline newline
28967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28974 character starts/ends the formula.
28975 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28976 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28988 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28998 \begin_layout Standard
28999 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29000 -syntax is given in section
29001 \begin_inset space ~
29005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29007 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29014 \begin_layout Standard
29018 \begin_inset space ~
29023 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29025 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29030 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29037 in this document is:
29038 \begin_inset Newline newline
29043 dummy entry for the character
29048 \begin_inset Newline newline
29060 \begin_inset space ~
29070 font use the command
29099 \begin_layout Standard
29100 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29105 \begin_inset space \space{}
29109 \begin_inset Newline newline
29125 \begin_inset Newline newline
29128 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29129 This command will make the font of all symbols
29136 \begin_inset space ~
29144 \begin_layout Standard
29145 If the characters |
29146 \begin_inset space \space{}
29150 \begin_inset space \space{}
29154 \begin_inset space \space{}
29158 \begin_inset space \space{}
29162 \begin_inset space \space{}
29165 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29166 a quote character in front of them.
29167 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29168 LatexCommand nomenclature
29169 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29170 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29177 \begin_layout Subsection
29178 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29179 \begin_inset Index idx
29182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29183 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29191 \begin_layout Standard
29192 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29193 -code of the symbol
29195 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29197 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29200 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29201 LatexCommand nomenclature
29203 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29210 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29214 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29215 LatexCommand nomenclature
29218 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29223 They will be sorted by
29224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29250 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29253 will be sorted before the
29257 since the character
29258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29265 is considered in sorting.
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29269 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29272 \begin_inset space ~
29277 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29278 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29280 For the example given, you can insert
29284 in this field for the
29285 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29292 will be located before
29293 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29299 \begin_layout Standard
29300 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29305 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29314 \begin_layout Subsection
29315 Nomenclature Options
29316 \begin_inset Index idx
29319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29320 Nomenclature ! Options
29328 \begin_layout Standard
29333 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29334 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29337 \begin_layout Description
29338 refeq Appends the phrase
29339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29354 to every nomenclature entry, where
29360 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29363 \begin_layout Description
29364 refpage Appends the phrase
29365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29380 to every nomenclature entry, where
29386 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29389 \begin_layout Description
29390 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29393 \begin_layout Standard
29394 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29395 class options list in the
29397 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29401 In this document the options
29408 \begin_layout Standard
29409 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29415 \begin_layout Standard
29416 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29417 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29422 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29425 \begin_layout Description
29435 \begin_layout Description
29438 nomrefpage Like the
29445 \begin_layout Description
29448 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29457 \begin_layout Description
29461 \begin_inset space ~
29467 \begin_inset space ~
29472 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29475 \begin_layout Standard
29477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29484 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29485 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29489 \begin_layout Standard
29497 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29500 \begin_inset Newline newline
29507 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29512 \begin_inset Newline newline
29516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29531 by their translation.
29534 \begin_layout Subsection
29535 Printing the Nomenclature
29536 \begin_inset Index idx
29539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29540 Nomenclature ! Printing
29548 \begin_layout Standard
29549 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29552 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29568 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29569 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29570 You can choose between these settings:
29573 \begin_layout Description
29574 Default a space of 1
29575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29581 \begin_layout Description
29583 \begin_inset space ~
29587 \begin_inset space ~
29590 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29593 \begin_layout Description
29594 Custom custom space
29597 \begin_layout Standard
29598 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29607 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29615 For example, in order to change the name to
29619 , add the following line to the preamble:
29622 \begin_layout Standard
29630 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29633 \begin_layout Subsection
29634 Nomenclature Program
29635 \begin_inset Index idx
29638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29639 Nomenclature ! Program
29645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29647 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29654 \begin_layout Standard
29660 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29661 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29663 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29668 by adding options, see section
29669 \begin_inset space ~
29673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29675 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29680 The available options are listed and explained in
29681 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29683 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29690 \begin_layout Section
29692 \begin_inset Index idx
29695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29702 \begin_inset Index idx
29705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29706 Document ! Branches
29712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29714 name "sec:Branches"
29721 \begin_layout Standard
29722 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29723 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29724 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29725 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29728 \begin_layout Standard
29729 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29730 allows you to put text into branches.
29731 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29732 To create a branch, either select the menu
29734 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29735 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29738 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29740 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29747 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29748 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29749 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29750 and whether the name of the branch should
29751 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29752 (see below for an example).
29753 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29754 to the name of the other) and to add
29755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29767 \begin_inset space ~
29770 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29771 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29774 \begin_layout Standard
29775 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29776 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29781 where you can choose a branch.
29782 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29786 \begin_layout Standard
29787 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29788 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29791 \begin_layout Standard
29792 \begin_inset Branch Question
29795 \begin_layout Standard
29796 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29804 \begin_layout Standard
29805 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29808 \begin_layout Standard
29809 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29817 \begin_layout Standard
29824 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29825 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29828 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29829 Consider for example a file
29830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29837 which has the above branches.
29839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29846 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29870 branch were inactive,
29871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29886 branch was active, likewise
29887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29902 branch was active, and
29903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29906 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29910 if both branches were active.
29911 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29914 \begin_layout Standard
29915 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29921 \begin_layout Standard
29922 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29923 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29924 definitions for each branch.
29925 For example you can define for the question branch
29929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29930 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29931 -syntax, see section
29932 \begin_inset space ~
29936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29938 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29950 \begin_layout Standard
29960 \begin_layout Standard
29970 \begin_layout Standard
29971 and for the answer branch
29974 \begin_layout Standard
29984 \begin_layout Standard
29994 \begin_layout Standard
29995 \begin_inset Branch Question
29998 \begin_layout Standard
30002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30030 \begin_layout Standard
30031 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30034 \begin_layout Standard
30038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30066 \begin_layout Standard
30067 Now it is possible to use the
30071 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30078 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30081 commands to obtain conditional output.
30082 Here is an example formula where only the
30089 \begin_inset Formula
30091 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30099 \begin_layout Standard
30100 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30108 \begin_layout Standard
30109 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30115 \begin_inset space \space{}
30118 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30120 For this advanced usage, see the
30126 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30131 \begin_layout Section
30133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30135 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30140 \begin_inset Index idx
30143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30152 \begin_layout Standard
30155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30156 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30159 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30161 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30167 \begin_inset Index idx
30170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30172 -packages ! hyperref
30177 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30178 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30179 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30180 part of the document.
30184 \begin_layout Standard
30185 The header information in the dialog tab
30189 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30190 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30191 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30192 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30196 \begin_inset space ~
30200 \begin_inset space ~
30205 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30206 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30207 and author entries.
30211 \begin_inset space ~
30215 \begin_inset space ~
30219 \begin_inset space ~
30224 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30227 \begin_layout Standard
30228 You can specify in the dialog tab
30232 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30237 \begin_inset space ~
30241 \begin_inset space ~
30245 \begin_inset space ~
30250 option allows long links to be split;
30253 \begin_inset space ~
30257 \begin_inset space ~
30261 \begin_inset space ~
30269 \begin_inset space ~
30274 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30277 \begin_inset space ~
30282 colors the different links.
30283 The default colors are:
30286 \begin_layout Labeling
30287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30292 for hyperlinks and URLs
30295 \begin_layout Labeling
30296 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30304 \begin_layout Labeling
30305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30313 \begin_layout Standard
30314 but you can change these in the field
30319 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30322 \begin_layout Standard
30325 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30328 \begin_layout Standard
30333 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30334 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30335 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30338 \begin_layout Standard
30343 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30344 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30345 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30355 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30356 when opening the PDF.
30358 \begin_inset space ~
30361 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30362 \begin_inset space ~
30365 1 will only display the sections.
30368 \begin_layout Standard
30369 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30370 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30376 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30377 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30386 \begin_layout Section
30388 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30392 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30399 \begin_layout Subsection
30402 \begin_inset Index idx
30405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30415 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30422 \begin_layout Standard
30423 As \SpecialChar LyX
30424 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30425 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30426 commands and constructs,
30429 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30430 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30431 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30432 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30433 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30434 cannot support all packages and
30438 \begin_layout Standard
30439 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30440 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30441 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30445 Code box is created by the menu
30447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30449 \begin_inset space ~
30454 or by the toolbar button
30467 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30475 \begin_layout Standard
30476 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30478 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30480 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
30484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30485 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
30490 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30497 , you can write the command part
30503 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30504 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30508 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30509 Code box behind the word.
30510 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30511 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30515 \begin_layout Standard
30516 \begin_inset Graphics
30517 filename clipart/ERT.png
30525 \begin_layout Standard
30529 \begin_layout Standard
30530 This is a line with a
30534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30557 \begin_layout Standard
30558 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30566 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30567 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30568 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30569 know that the command is finished.
30577 \begin_layout Subsection
30578 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30580 \begin_inset Argument 1
30583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30584 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30591 \begin_inset Index idx
30594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30604 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30611 \begin_layout Standard
30612 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30613 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30614 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30615 uses in the background.
30616 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30617 is based on commands, you can
30618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30626 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30627 any time if you know the right commands.
30628 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30629 is the end of the day.
30630 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30631 all caption labels bold.
30632 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30634 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30638 \begin_layout Standard
30639 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30641 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30643 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30646 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30655 \begin_layout Standard
30656 As result you find that the package
30661 \begin_inset Index idx
30664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30666 -packages ! caption
30672 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30674 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30677 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30681 \begin_inset space ~
30689 \begin_layout Standard
30694 usepackage[options]{package name}
30697 \begin_layout Standard
30698 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30699 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30700 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30701 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30704 \begin_layout Standard
30705 In your case the package name is
30710 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30715 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30716 So you add the command
30719 \begin_layout Standard
30724 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30727 \begin_layout Standard
30728 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30733 For more commands provided by the
30737 package, have a look at its documentation,
30738 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30752 \begin_layout Standard
30753 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30755 For example if you use a
30759 class, you don't need the package
30763 , you can instead write
30766 \begin_layout Standard
30771 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30776 \begin_layout Standard
30777 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30778 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30779 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30786 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30789 \begin_layout Standard
30790 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30791 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30793 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30794 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30795 Code box as described in the previous
30799 \begin_layout Standard
30800 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30801 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30806 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30813 \begin_layout Standard
30814 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30820 \begin_layout Standard
30824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30834 \begin_inset Note Note
30837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30838 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30846 \begin_layout Left Header
30847 \begin_inset Argument 1
30850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30870 \begin_inset Note Note
30873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30874 defines the header line as described below
30882 \begin_layout Center Header
30883 \begin_inset Argument 1
30886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30895 \begin_layout Right Header
30896 \begin_inset Argument 1
30899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30920 \begin_layout Left Footer
30921 \begin_inset Argument 1
30924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30945 \begin_layout Center Footer
30946 \begin_inset Argument 1
30949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30961 \begin_inset Newline newline
30965 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30971 \begin_layout Right Footer
30972 \begin_inset Argument 1
30975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30997 \begin_layout Section
30998 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31001 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31006 \begin_inset Index idx
31009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31010 Document ! Header/Footer line
31016 \begin_inset Index idx
31019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31028 \begin_layout Standard
31029 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31033 \begin_inset space ~
31044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31050 \begin_inset space ~
31056 As a second step add in the menu
31058 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31059 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31068 Custom Header/Footerlines
31071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31075 This module offers the following 6
31076 \begin_inset space ~
31082 \begin_layout Description
31084 \begin_inset space ~
31088 \begin_inset space ~
31092 \begin_inset space ~
31096 \begin_inset space ~
31100 \begin_inset space ~
31106 \begin_layout Description
31108 \begin_inset space ~
31112 \begin_inset space ~
31116 \begin_inset space ~
31120 \begin_inset space ~
31124 \begin_inset space ~
31130 \begin_layout Standard
31131 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31132 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
31135 \begin_layout Standard
31136 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31137 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31139 \begin_inset space ~
31143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31145 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31149 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31152 \begin_layout Standard
31153 \begin_inset Float figure
31159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31162 \begin_inset Tabular
31163 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31164 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31165 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31166 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31167 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31169 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31187 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31216 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31227 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31231 The normal text on the page goes here.
31232 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31234 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31235 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
31240 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31249 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31260 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31278 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31289 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31307 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31325 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31330 name "fig:Page-layout"
31334 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31347 \begin_layout Standard
31348 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31356 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31360 \begin_inset space ~
31365 is set to “Default”.
31366 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31375 \begin_layout Subsection
31379 \begin_layout Standard
31380 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
31381 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
31382 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31383 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31385 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
31387 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31390 \begin_layout Standard
31391 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31392 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31398 \begin_inset space ~
31406 \begin_layout Description
31409 thepage prints the current page number
31412 \begin_layout Description
31415 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31418 \begin_layout Description
31421 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31424 \begin_layout Description
31427 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31428 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31435 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31438 because it usually goes in a left header.
31441 \begin_layout Description
31444 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31445 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31447 It is normally used in the right header.
31450 \begin_layout Subsection
31451 Default header/footer
31454 \begin_layout Standard
31455 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31456 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31457 footer has the page number.
31458 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31459 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31460 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31463 \begin_inset space ~
31471 \begin_layout Subsection
31475 \begin_layout Standard
31476 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31477 Some pages are different.
31478 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
31479 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
31480 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31481 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31482 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31486 Header and footer decoration line
31489 \begin_layout Standard
31490 By default, you get a 0.4
31491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31494 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31495 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31507 in the following way:
31510 \begin_layout Standard
31517 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31520 \begin_layout Standard
31521 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31534 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31541 \begin_layout Standard
31542 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31544 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31545 \begin_inset space ~
31549 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31558 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31559 Several header/footer lines
31562 \begin_layout Standard
31563 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31564 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
31565 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
31567 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31582 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31583 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31585 \begin_inset space ~
31593 \begin_layout Standard
31600 headheight}{height}
31603 \begin_layout Standard
31608 is a size in standard units (e.
31609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31613 \begin_inset space \space{}
31621 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
31622 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31623 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31624 logfile with the menu
31626 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31628 \begin_inset space ~
31636 \begin_inset space ~
31641 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31646 \begin_inset Index idx
31649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31651 -packages ! fancyhdr
31657 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31658 for your header/footer.
31661 \begin_layout Subsection
31665 \begin_layout Standard
31666 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31667 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31668 This example consists of the following definition:
31671 \begin_layout Description
31673 \begin_inset space ~
31682 , empty optional argument
31685 \begin_layout Description
31687 \begin_inset space ~
31690 Header empty, empty optional argument
31693 \begin_layout Description
31695 \begin_inset space ~
31704 in the optional argument
31707 \begin_layout Description
31709 \begin_inset space ~
31718 in the optional argument
31721 \begin_layout Description
31723 \begin_inset space ~
31736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31740 \begin_inset Newline newline
31744 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31751 in the optional argument
31754 \begin_layout Description
31756 \begin_inset space ~
31765 , empty optional argument
31768 \begin_layout Description
31771 headrulewidth set to 2
31772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31778 \begin_layout Standard
31779 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31780 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31786 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31795 \begin_layout Standard
31796 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31802 \begin_layout Standard
31806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31810 pagestyle{headings}
31816 \begin_inset Note Note
31819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31820 switches back to page style with the default headings
31828 \begin_layout Section
31829 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31832 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31837 \begin_inset Index idx
31840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31847 \begin_inset Index idx
31850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31859 \begin_layout Standard
31861 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31862 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31863 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31866 \begin_layout Subsection
31870 \begin_layout Standard
31871 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31877 \begin_inset Index idx
31880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31882 -packages ! preview-latex
31887 (on some systems named simply
31892 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31894 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31900 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31902 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31910 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31911 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31912 -package are automatically
31913 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31917 \begin_layout Subsection
31921 \begin_layout Standard
31922 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31923 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31925 activate the option
31928 \begin_inset space ~
31935 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31941 \begin_inset space ~
31945 \begin_inset space ~
31948 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31955 \begin_inset space ~
31968 \begin_inset space ~
31973 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31976 \begin_layout Standard
31977 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31982 \begin_inset space ~
31990 \begin_inset space ~
31998 \begin_layout Standard
31999 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32000 and when you finish
32004 \begin_layout Standard
32005 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32013 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32014 generated by activating the option
32017 \begin_inset space ~
32023 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32031 \begin_layout Subsection
32032 Selected document parts
32035 \begin_layout Standard
32036 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32037 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32038 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32039 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32041 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32043 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32047 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32048 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32049 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32052 \begin_layout Standard
32053 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32060 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32072 is explained in section
32074 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32079 \begin_inset space ~
32089 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32090 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32091 the final rotated boxes,
32092 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32093 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32095 Here is the result:
32098 \begin_layout Standard
32099 \begin_inset Preview
32101 \begin_layout Standard
32106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32110 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32116 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32126 height_special "totalheight"
32131 backgroundcolor "none"
32134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32159 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32165 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32187 \begin_layout Standard
32188 Previewing works also for colors.
32189 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32208 is explained in section
32215 \begin_inset space ~
32228 \begin_layout Standard
32229 \begin_inset Preview
32231 \begin_layout Standard
32235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32254 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32259 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32278 \begin_layout Standard
32279 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32285 \begin_layout Standard
32286 If \SpecialChar LyX
32287 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32288 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32289 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32290 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32291 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32292 the \SpecialChar TeX
32294 If \SpecialChar LyX
32295 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32296 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32298 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32299 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32300 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32303 \begin_layout Subsection
32308 \begin_layout Standard
32309 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32310 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32313 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32315 \begin_inset space ~
32320 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32322 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32324 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32325 's main window, then only this selection
32326 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32327 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32328 the source view window.
32333 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32334 ; but note that if you have
32335 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32337 not just the one which is open at the time.
32340 \begin_layout Section
32341 Advanced Find and Replace
32342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32344 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32349 \begin_inset Index idx
32352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32359 \begin_inset Index idx
32362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32371 \begin_layout Subsection
32375 \begin_layout Standard
32376 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32377 allows for searching of complex,
32378 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32380 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32381 The key-features are:
32384 \begin_layout Itemize
32385 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32386 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32387 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32391 \begin_layout Itemize
32392 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32393 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32394 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32395 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32398 \begin_layout Itemize
32399 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32400 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32401 outside of mathematics environments
32404 \begin_layout Itemize
32405 Search may be widened to a specific
32410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32414 \begin_inset space ~
32417 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32418 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32425 \begin_layout Itemize
32426 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32427 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32432 \begin_inset space ~
32435 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32438 \begin_layout Subsection
32442 \begin_layout Standard
32443 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32445 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32458 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32461 ) or the toolbar button
32464 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32470 Advanced Find and Replace
32475 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32479 \begin_layout Standard
32485 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32489 \begin_inset space ~
32494 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32497 arg "paragraph-break"
32501 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32502 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32506 arg "paragraph-break"
32509 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32513 searches backwards.
32516 \begin_layout Standard
32520 \begin_inset space ~
32525 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32534 \begin_inset space ~
32539 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32543 Searching for mathematics
32546 \begin_layout Standard
32547 Mathematical formulas, such as
32548 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32551 or something more complex like
32552 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32555 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32560 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32561 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32562 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32563 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32569 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32573 \begin_layout Standard
32574 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32575 This is done by switching to the
32579 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32584 This way, entering in the
32591 \begin_layout Itemize
32592 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32593 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32596 \begin_layout Itemize
32597 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32598 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32601 \begin_layout Itemize
32602 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32603 of it only within section headings.
32604 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32605 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32609 \begin_layout Itemize
32610 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32611 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32614 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32618 \begin_layout Standard
32619 The entries made in the
32623 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32626 \begin_inset space ~
32632 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32636 button or alternatively press
32639 arg "paragraph-break"
32646 while the cursor is in the
32649 \begin_inset space ~
32657 \begin_layout Standard
32658 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32660 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32664 \begin_layout Itemize
32665 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32666 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32674 with its typewriter version
32675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32689 \begin_layout Itemize
32690 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32696 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32708 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32715 (you may want to enable the
32718 \begin_inset space ~
32726 \begin_inset space ~
32731 options and disable the
32739 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32747 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32748 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32752 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32755 , or occurrences of
32756 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32760 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32766 \begin_layout Subsection
32770 \begin_layout Standard
32771 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32776 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32778 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32780 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32789 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32795 This is done with the context menu
32797 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32798 Insert Regular Expression
32800 while the cursor is in the
32805 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32806 expression matching rules
32810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32811 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32818 \begin_inset space ~
32821 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32822 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32828 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32829 same text in the document.
32830 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32831 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32834 \begin_layout Enumerate
32835 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32840 editor the fraction
32841 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32845 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32848 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32849 fractions with the given denominator.
32852 \begin_layout Enumerate
32853 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32865 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32870 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32871 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32872 Also, by inserting a
32873 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32876 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32877 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32880 \begin_layout Standard
32881 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32882 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32883 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32886 , and referring back to them through
32887 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32891 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32895 For example, try searching with the regexp
32896 \begin_inset Newline newline
32899 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32902 \begin_inset Newline newline
32905 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32908 \begin_layout Standard
32909 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32912 \begin_layout Standard
32913 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32921 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32922 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32923 sub-expressions is absolute.
32925 \begin_inset space ~
32929 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32932 always refers to the first occurrence of
32933 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32936 in all entered regexps.
32944 \begin_layout Section
32946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32948 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32953 \begin_inset Index idx
32956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32965 \begin_layout Standard
32967 has a built-in spell checker.
32970 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32977 key or the toolbar button
32980 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32983 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32984 beginning of the currently selected text.
32985 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32986 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32987 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32988 scrolled so that it is visible.
32989 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32990 n, if any could be found.
32991 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32995 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32996 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32999 \begin_layout Standard
33000 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33007 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33008 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33010 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33011 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33014 \begin_inset space ~
33022 arg "dialog-show character"
33025 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33027 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33030 \begin_layout Standard
33031 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33032 can be downloaded from here:
33033 \begin_inset Newline newline
33037 \begin_inset Flex URL
33040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33042 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33048 \begin_inset Newline newline
33052 \begin_inset space ~
33055 files for each language.
33056 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33057 \begin_inset space ~
33060 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33061 's installation subfolder
33069 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33071 \begin_inset Newline newline
33074 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33075 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33076 but in most cases these are
33092 is the language code.
33095 \begin_layout Subsection
33099 \begin_layout Standard
33102 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33103 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33105 \begin_inset space ~
33108 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33111 you can set the following things:
33114 \begin_layout Description
33116 \begin_inset space ~
33119 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33120 should use for spell checking.
33121 Depending on your platform,
33135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33136 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33137 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33152 \begin_inset space ~
33155 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33158 \begin_layout Description
33160 \begin_inset space ~
33163 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33164 will always use the given language
33165 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33168 \begin_layout Description
33170 \begin_inset space ~
33173 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33179 \begin_inset space \space{}
33183 This should normally not be needed.
33186 \begin_layout Description
33188 \begin_inset space ~
33192 \begin_inset space ~
33195 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33207 \begin_layout Description
33209 \begin_inset space ~
33212 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33213 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33214 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33215 appear in a context menu.
33216 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33220 \begin_layout Description
33222 \begin_inset space ~
33226 \begin_inset space ~
33230 \begin_inset space ~
33233 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33237 \begin_layout Section
33239 \begin_inset Index idx
33242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33251 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33258 \begin_layout Standard
33260 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33261 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33271 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33273 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33282 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33284 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33285 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33286 which are available for many languages.
33289 \begin_layout Standard
33290 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33291 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33295 \begin_layout Subsection
33296 Setting up the thesaurus
33299 \begin_layout Standard
33308 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33312 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33317 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33323 \begin_inset space ~
33331 For instance, the US English files are named:
33334 \begin_layout Itemize
33338 \begin_layout Itemize
33342 \begin_layout Standard
33351 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33352 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33355 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33356 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33357 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33359 \begin_inset space ~
33364 ) to the path where they are installed.
33368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33369 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33370 ies, typical locations are
33376 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33380 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33384 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33387 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33393 LibreOffice-<Version>
33400 On the Mac, the default location is
33402 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33403 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33404 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33405 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33406 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33407 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33415 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33416 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33417 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33421 \begin_layout Standard
33422 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33423 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33427 \begin_layout Itemize
33428 \begin_inset Flex URL
33431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33433 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33441 \begin_layout Standard
33442 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33443 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33445 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33446 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33447 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33449 \begin_inset space ~
33454 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33456 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33457 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33461 \begin_layout Standard
33462 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33464 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33467 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33473 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33476 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33477 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33485 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33486 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33487 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33489 \begin_inset space ~
33494 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33497 \begin_layout Subsection
33498 Using the thesaurus
33501 \begin_layout Standard
33502 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33504 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33507 or the toolbar button
33510 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33513 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33515 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33517 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33518 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33519 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33528 ), related terms (such as
33531 \begin_inset space ~
33540 ), compounds (such as
33543 \begin_inset space ~
33552 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33561 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33564 \begin_layout Standard
33565 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33566 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33570 \begin_layout Standard
33571 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33572 the dictionary, such as the above
33576 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33581 \begin_inset space \space{}
33584 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33585 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33586 For example, looking up the word form
33590 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33595 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33600 \begin_inset space \space{}
33611 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33612 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33613 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33616 \begin_layout Section
33618 \begin_inset Index idx
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33628 \begin_inset Index idx
33631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33632 Document ! Change Tracking
33638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33640 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33647 \begin_layout Standard
33648 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33649 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33650 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33651 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33653 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33655 \begin_inset space ~
33658 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33660 \begin_inset space ~
33668 \begin_layout Standard
33669 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33683 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33684 You can change the color in
33686 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33687 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33689 \begin_inset space ~
33693 \begin_inset space ~
33698 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33704 \begin_inset Index idx
33707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33708 Color ! Change tracking
33713 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33714 's status bar when the
33715 cursor is in changed text.
33716 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33719 arg "changes-merge"
33725 \begin_layout Standard
33726 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33728 \begin_inset Index idx
33731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33740 \begin_layout Standard
33741 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33747 \begin_layout Standard
33748 \begin_inset Graphics
33749 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33758 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33764 \begin_layout Standard
33765 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33768 \begin_layout Standard
33769 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33775 \begin_layout Standard
33776 \begin_inset Tabular
33777 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33778 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33779 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33780 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33790 arg "changes-track"
33798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33806 \begin_inset space ~
33809 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33811 \begin_inset space ~
33820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33829 arg "changes-output"
33837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33845 \begin_inset space ~
33848 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33850 \begin_inset space ~
33854 \begin_inset space ~
33858 \begin_inset space ~
33867 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33888 Jumps to the next change
33894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33903 arg "change-accept"
33911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33919 \begin_inset space ~
33922 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33924 \begin_inset space ~
33933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33942 arg "change-reject"
33950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33958 \begin_inset space ~
33961 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33963 \begin_inset space ~
33972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33981 arg "changes-merge"
33989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33995 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34000 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34002 \begin_inset space ~
34011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34020 arg "all-changes-accept"
34028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34034 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34036 \begin_inset space ~
34039 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34041 \begin_inset space ~
34045 \begin_inset space ~
34054 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34063 arg "all-changes-reject"
34071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34077 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34082 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34084 \begin_inset space ~
34088 \begin_inset space ~
34097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34121 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34123 \begin_inset space ~
34132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34155 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34157 \begin_inset space ~
34173 \begin_layout Standard
34174 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34180 \begin_layout Standard
34181 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34201 \begin_layout Standard
34202 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34203 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34204 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34205 the next change after the current cursor position.
34206 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34207 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34208 step to the next change.
34209 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34212 \begin_layout Standard
34213 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34214 to describe a change.
34217 \begin_layout Standard
34218 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34224 \begin_inset Index idx
34227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34229 -packages ! dvipost
34235 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34237 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34243 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34247 \begin_layout Section
34248 Comparison of Documents
34249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34251 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34256 \begin_inset Index idx
34259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34260 Comparison of documents
34268 \begin_layout Standard
34269 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34272 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34276 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34277 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34279 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34281 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34285 \begin_inset space ~
34289 \begin_inset space ~
34293 \begin_inset space ~
34302 \begin_inset space ~
34306 \begin_inset space ~
34310 \begin_inset space ~
34314 \begin_inset space ~
34318 \begin_inset space ~
34322 \begin_inset space ~
34327 enables the change tracking option
34330 \begin_inset space ~
34334 \begin_inset space ~
34338 \begin_inset space ~
34343 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34346 \begin_layout Section
34347 International Support
34348 \begin_inset Index idx
34351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34352 International support
34360 \begin_layout Standard
34361 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34362 with any language you want.
34363 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34364 up \SpecialChar LyX
34366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34368 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34375 \begin_layout Standard
34376 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34377 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34378 \begin_inset space ~
34382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34384 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34391 \begin_layout Subsection
34393 \begin_inset Index idx
34396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34403 \begin_inset Index idx
34406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34407 Document ! Settings
34413 \begin_inset Index idx
34416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34417 Document ! Language
34425 \begin_layout Standard
34428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34429 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34432 dialog lets you set
34434 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34439 \begin_layout Standard
34444 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34449 \begin_inset space ~
34454 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34455 For details about the different encoding options see section
34456 \begin_inset space ~
34460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34462 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34469 \begin_layout Subsection
34470 Keyboard mapping configuration
34471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34473 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34480 \begin_layout Standard
34481 If you have for example a U.
34482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34485 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34486 can use an alternate keymap.
34487 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34492 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34493 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34494 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34497 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34498 \begin_inset space ~
34502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34504 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34509 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34510 which one you want to use.
34513 \begin_layout Standard
34514 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34515 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34516 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34520 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34521 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34522 one to support the characters you want.
34523 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34530 \begin_layout Chapter
34533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34535 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34542 \begin_layout Standard
34543 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34544 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34545 topic inside the user's guide.
34548 \begin_layout Section
34550 \begin_inset Index idx
34553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34562 \begin_layout Standard
34567 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34570 \begin_layout Subsection
34574 \begin_layout Standard
34575 Creates a new document.
34578 \begin_layout Subsection
34582 \begin_layout Standard
34583 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34584 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34585 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34588 \begin_layout Subsection
34592 \begin_layout Standard
34596 \begin_layout Subsection
34600 \begin_layout Standard
34601 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34602 Click there on a file to open it.
34605 \begin_layout Subsection
34609 \begin_layout Standard
34610 Closes the current document.
34613 \begin_layout Subsection
34617 \begin_layout Standard
34618 Closes all opened documents.
34621 \begin_layout Subsection
34625 \begin_layout Standard
34626 Saves the actual document.
34629 \begin_layout Subsection
34633 \begin_layout Standard
34634 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34637 \begin_layout Subsection
34641 \begin_layout Standard
34642 Saves all opened documents.
34645 \begin_layout Subsection
34649 \begin_layout Standard
34650 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34653 \begin_layout Subsection
34657 \begin_layout Standard
34658 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34659 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34660 It is described in the section
34662 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34667 Additional Features
34672 \begin_layout Subsection
34676 \begin_layout Standard
34677 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34678 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34680 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34681 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34685 \begin_layout Standard
34686 When using the menu entry
34689 \begin_inset space ~
34694 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34698 \begin_inset space ~
34702 \begin_inset space ~
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34711 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34712 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34715 \begin_layout Subsection
34717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34719 name "subsec:Export"
34726 \begin_layout Standard
34727 You can export your document to various file formats.
34728 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34730 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34731 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34732 during its configuration.
34735 \begin_layout Standard
34736 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34738 \begin_inset space ~
34742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34744 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34751 \begin_layout Description
34757 \begin_inset space ~
34760 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34762 \begin_inset space ~
34765 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34766 \begin_inset Newline newline
34769 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34770 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34774 \begin_layout Description
34775 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34781 \begin_layout Description
34783 \begin_inset space ~
34786 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34792 \begin_layout Description
34793 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34794 's native DVI-format.
34795 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34796 files paths or file names in your document.
34798 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34805 \begin_layout Description
34806 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34807 in files paths or file names
34810 \begin_layout Description
34812 \begin_inset space ~
34819 ) DVI-format using the program
34821 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34824 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34836 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34844 \begin_layout Description
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34849 (cropped) the same as
34853 but with cropped page margins.
34856 \begin_layout Description
34858 \begin_inset space ~
34861 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34865 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34870 \begin_layout Description
34874 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34882 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34890 \begin_layout Description
34892 \begin_inset space ~
34896 \begin_inset space ~
34899 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34903 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34911 \begin_layout Description
34915 \begin_inset space ~
34924 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34925 source that is compilable with the program
34927 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34931 \begin_layout Description
34935 \begin_inset space ~
34940 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34941 source, additionally all images used in the document
34942 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34946 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34949 \begin_layout Description
34953 \begin_inset space ~
34958 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34959 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34960 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34968 \begin_layout Description
34972 \begin_inset space ~
34981 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34982 source that is compilable with the program
34988 \begin_layout Description
34990 \begin_inset space ~
34994 \begin_inset space ~
35001 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35002 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35008 \begin_layout Description
35010 \begin_inset space ~
35013 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35014 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35020 \begin_inset space \space{}
35025 \begin_inset space ~
35029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35044 represent the version number)
35047 \begin_layout Description
35049 \begin_inset space ~
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35056 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35057 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35058 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35062 \begin_layout Description
35063 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35064 's internal XHTML engine
35067 \begin_layout Description
35069 \begin_inset space ~
35073 \begin_inset space ~
35077 \begin_inset space ~
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35084 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35089 For the conversion the program
35098 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35101 \begin_layout Description
35102 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35107 \begin_layout Description
35109 \begin_inset space ~
35112 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35114 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35117 For the conversion the program
35126 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35129 \begin_layout Description
35131 \begin_inset space ~
35134 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35135 For the conversion the program
35144 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35147 \begin_layout Description
35149 \begin_inset space ~
35152 (cropped) the same as
35155 \begin_inset space ~
35160 but with cropped page margins
35163 \begin_layout Description
35167 \begin_inset space ~
35172 PDF-format using the program
35176 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35179 \begin_layout Description
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35187 \begin_inset space ~
35195 \begin_inset space ~
35200 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35205 \begin_inset space \space{}
35208 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35212 \begin_layout Description
35216 \begin_inset space ~
35221 PDF-format using the program
35223 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35226 , produces PDF-files directly
35229 \begin_layout Description
35233 \begin_inset space ~
35238 PDF-format using the program
35242 , produces PDF-files directly
35245 \begin_layout Description
35249 \begin_inset space ~
35254 PDF-format using the program
35258 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35261 \begin_layout Description
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35270 PDF-format using the program
35275 , produces PDF-files directly
35278 \begin_layout Description
35282 \begin_inset space ~
35290 \begin_layout Description
35294 \begin_inset space ~
35298 \begin_inset space ~
35303 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35304 and then exported as text using the program
35309 \begin_layout Description
35314 PostScript format using the program
35322 options see section
35323 \begin_inset space ~
35327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35329 reference "subsec:General-output"
35336 \begin_layout Description
35337 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35338 source and also code in the statistical programming
35352 it is possible to use
35356 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35360 \begin_layout Standard
35361 If one of the menu entries
35368 \begin_inset space ~
35377 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35379 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35381 \begin_inset space ~
35385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35387 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35392 \begin_inset Index idx
35395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35396 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35405 \begin_layout Subsection
35409 \begin_layout Standard
35410 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35411 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35414 \begin_inset space ~
35418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35420 reference "sec:Paths"
35425 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35434 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35435 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35436 's preferences as described in section
35437 \begin_inset space ~
35441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35443 reference "subsec:Converters"
35450 \begin_layout Subsection
35451 New and Close Window
35454 \begin_layout Standard
35455 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35459 \begin_layout Subsection
35463 \begin_layout Standard
35464 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35467 \begin_layout Section
35469 \begin_inset Index idx
35472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35481 \begin_layout Subsection
35485 \begin_layout Standard
35486 Described in section
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35493 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35500 \begin_layout Subsection
35501 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35504 \begin_layout Standard
35505 Described in section
35506 \begin_inset space ~
35510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35512 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35519 \begin_layout Subsection
35523 \begin_layout Standard
35524 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35525 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35528 \begin_layout Subsection
35532 \begin_layout Standard
35533 Selects the whole document.
35536 \begin_layout Subsection
35537 Find & Replace (Quick)
35540 \begin_layout Standard
35541 Described in section
35542 \begin_inset space ~
35546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35548 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35555 \begin_layout Subsection
35556 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35559 \begin_layout Standard
35560 Described in section
35561 \begin_inset space ~
35565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35567 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35574 \begin_layout Subsection
35575 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35578 \begin_layout Standard
35579 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35583 \begin_layout Subsection
35587 \begin_layout Standard
35588 Described in section
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35595 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35602 \begin_layout Subsection
35604 \begin_inset Index idx
35607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35608 Paragraph ! Settings
35616 \begin_layout Standard
35617 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35618 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35622 \begin_layout Standard
35623 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35624 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35630 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35631 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35633 \begin_inset space ~
35641 \begin_layout Subsection
35642 Table and Rows & Columns
35645 \begin_layout Standard
35646 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35647 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35648 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35651 \begin_layout Subsection
35655 \begin_layout Standard
35656 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35657 It will dissolve this inset.
35658 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35662 \begin_layout Subsection
35666 \begin_layout Standard
35667 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35668 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35671 \begin_layout Subsection
35672 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35675 \begin_layout Standard
35676 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35678 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35679 \begin_inset space ~
35683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35685 reference "sec:Nesting"
35690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35692 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35699 \begin_layout Subsection
35702 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35705 \begin_layout Standard
35706 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35707 nts of the same type.
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35715 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35719 for an explanation.
35722 \begin_layout Section
35724 \begin_inset Index idx
35727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35736 \begin_layout Standard
35737 At the bottom of the
35741 menu the opened documents are listed.
35744 \begin_layout Subsection
35745 Open/Close all Insets
35748 \begin_layout Standard
35749 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35752 \begin_layout Subsection
35753 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35756 \begin_layout Standard
35757 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35760 \begin_layout Standard
35761 Math macros are described in the
35768 \begin_layout Subsection
35772 \begin_layout Standard
35773 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35780 reference "sec:Navigating"
35785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35787 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35794 \begin_layout Subsection
35798 \begin_layout Standard
35799 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35801 \begin_inset space ~
35805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35807 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35814 \begin_layout Subsection
35818 \begin_layout Standard
35819 Opens a window showing console messages.
35820 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35825 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35826 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35827 is processing the document.
35830 \begin_layout Subsection
35832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35834 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35839 \begin_inset Index idx
35842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35851 \begin_layout Standard
35852 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35853 All toolbars and the
35856 \begin_inset space ~
35861 can be turned on and off.
35866 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35890 \begin_inset space ~
35895 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35899 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35906 \begin_layout Standard
35911 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35915 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35916 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35917 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35918 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35919 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35922 \begin_layout Standard
35924 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35931 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35938 \begin_layout Subsection
35942 \begin_layout Standard
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35950 \begin_inset space ~
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35958 \begin_inset space ~
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35966 \begin_inset space ~
35971 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35972 's main window vertically while
35975 \begin_inset space ~
35979 \begin_inset space ~
35983 \begin_inset space ~
35987 \begin_inset space ~
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35995 \begin_inset space ~
36000 will split it horizontally.
36001 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36002 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36003 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36004 three or more documents at the same time.
36005 To close a split view, use the menu
36008 \begin_inset space ~
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36020 \begin_layout Subsection
36024 \begin_layout Standard
36025 Closes a split view.
36028 \begin_layout Subsection
36032 \begin_layout Standard
36033 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36034 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36035 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36036 's main window fullscreen.
36037 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36038 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36041 \begin_layout Section
36043 \begin_inset Index idx
36046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36055 \begin_layout Subsection
36059 \begin_layout Standard
36060 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36061 \begin_inset space ~
36065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36067 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36078 \begin_layout Subsection
36080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36082 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36089 \begin_layout Standard
36090 Here you can insert the following characters:
36093 \begin_layout Description
36098 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36101 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36102 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36103 -packages you have installed.
36104 You can get a complete display by checking
36107 \begin_inset space ~
36113 \begin_inset Newline newline
36117 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36125 Not all characters will be visible in the
36129 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36130 dialog (see section
36131 \begin_inset space ~
36135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36137 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36141 ) can display every character.
36149 \begin_layout Description
36150 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36154 \begin_layout Description
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36160 \begin_inset space ~
36163 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36164 \begin_inset space ~
36168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36170 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36177 \begin_layout Description
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36182 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36185 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36186 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36192 \begin_layout Description
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36197 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36200 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36201 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36207 \begin_layout Description
36209 \begin_inset space ~
36212 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36216 \begin_layout Description
36218 \begin_inset space ~
36221 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36225 \begin_layout Description
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36230 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36236 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36242 \begin_layout Description
36244 \begin_inset space ~
36247 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36251 \begin_layout Description
36253 \begin_inset space ~
36257 \begin_inset Index idx
36260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36267 \begin_inset Index idx
36270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36271 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36276 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36277 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36279 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36285 \begin_inset Index idx
36288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36296 \begin_inset Newline newline
36299 More information about this feature can be found in the
36305 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36311 \begin_layout Description
36312 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36314 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36315 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36319 \begin_layout Subsection
36323 \begin_layout Standard
36324 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36327 \begin_layout Description
36328 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36329 \begin_inset script superscript
36331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36340 \begin_layout Description
36341 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36342 \begin_inset script subscript
36344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36353 \begin_layout Description
36355 \begin_inset space ~
36358 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36359 \begin_inset space ~
36363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36365 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36372 \begin_layout Description
36374 \begin_inset space ~
36377 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36384 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36391 \begin_layout Description
36393 \begin_inset space ~
36396 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36397 \begin_inset space ~
36401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36403 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36410 \begin_layout Description
36412 \begin_inset space ~
36415 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36421 \begin_inset space \space{}
36424 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36425 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36434 To insert a fraction use the command
36439 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36443 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36452 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36459 \begin_layout Description
36461 \begin_inset space ~
36464 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36465 \begin_inset space ~
36469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36471 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36478 \begin_layout Description
36480 \begin_inset space ~
36483 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36490 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36497 \begin_layout Description
36499 \begin_inset space ~
36502 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36509 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36516 \begin_layout Description
36517 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36518 \begin_inset space ~
36522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36524 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36531 \begin_layout Description
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36536 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36537 \begin_inset space ~
36541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36543 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36550 \begin_layout Description
36552 \begin_inset space ~
36555 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36562 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36569 \begin_layout Description
36571 \begin_inset space ~
36575 \begin_inset space ~
36578 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36585 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36592 \begin_layout Description
36594 \begin_inset space ~
36597 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36598 as described in section
36599 \begin_inset space ~
36603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36605 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36612 \begin_layout Description
36614 \begin_inset space ~
36617 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36624 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36631 \begin_layout Description
36633 \begin_inset space ~
36636 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36637 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36639 \begin_inset space ~
36643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36645 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36652 \begin_layout Description
36654 \begin_inset space ~
36657 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36658 \begin_inset space ~
36662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36664 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36671 \begin_layout Description
36673 \begin_inset space ~
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36680 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36681 \begin_inset space ~
36685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36687 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36694 \begin_layout Subsection
36698 \begin_layout Standard
36699 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36703 \begin_inset space ~
36724 are described in section
36725 \begin_inset space ~
36729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36731 reference "sec:toc"
36740 is described in section
36741 \begin_inset space ~
36745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36747 reference "sec:Index"
36755 is described in section
36756 \begin_inset space ~
36760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36762 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36768 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36771 is described in section
36772 \begin_inset space ~
36776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36778 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36785 \begin_layout Subsection
36789 \begin_layout Standard
36790 To insert floats, as described in section
36791 \begin_inset space ~
36795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36797 reference "sec:Floats"
36801 and in detail the chapter
36808 \begin_inset space ~
36816 \begin_layout Subsection
36820 \begin_layout Standard
36821 To insert notes, described in section
36822 \begin_inset space ~
36826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36828 reference "sec:Notes"
36835 \begin_layout Subsection
36839 \begin_layout Standard
36840 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36842 Branches are described in section
36843 \begin_inset space ~
36847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36849 reference "sec:Branches"
36856 \begin_layout Subsection
36860 \begin_layout Standard
36861 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36862 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36864 An example is the document class
36865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36872 with three custom insets.
36875 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36879 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36885 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36888 \begin_layout Subsection
36890 \begin_inset Index idx
36893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36902 \begin_layout Standard
36903 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36905 For more information see chapter
36907 External Document Parts
36910 \begin_inset space ~
36916 \begin_layout Subsection
36918 \begin_inset Index idx
36921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36930 \begin_layout Standard
36931 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36932 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36939 \begin_inset space ~
36947 \begin_layout Subsection
36951 \begin_layout Standard
36956 dialog as described in section
36957 \begin_inset space ~
36961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36963 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36970 \begin_layout Subsection
36974 \begin_layout Standard
36979 as described in section
36980 \begin_inset space ~
36984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36986 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36993 \begin_layout Subsection
36997 \begin_layout Standard
37002 as described in section
37003 \begin_inset space ~
37007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37009 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37016 \begin_layout Subsection
37018 \begin_inset Index idx
37021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37028 \begin_inset Index idx
37031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37032 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
37040 \begin_layout Standard
37041 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
37042 Floats are described in section
37043 \begin_inset space ~
37047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37049 reference "sec:Floats"
37053 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37055 Multi-page Captions
37060 \begin_inset space ~
37068 \begin_layout Subsection
37072 \begin_layout Standard
37073 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37074 \begin_inset space ~
37078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37080 reference "sec:Index"
37087 \begin_layout Subsection
37091 \begin_layout Standard
37092 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37093 \begin_inset space ~
37097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37099 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37106 \begin_layout Subsection
37110 \begin_layout Standard
37111 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37112 Tables are described in section
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37119 reference "sec:Tables"
37123 and in detail in the chapter
37130 \begin_inset space ~
37138 \begin_layout Subsection
37142 \begin_layout Standard
37148 Graphics are described in section
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37155 reference "sec:Graphics"
37162 \begin_layout Subsection
37166 \begin_layout Standard
37167 Inserts a URL as described in section
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37174 reference "subsec:URLs"
37181 \begin_layout Subsection
37185 \begin_layout Standard
37186 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37187 \begin_inset space ~
37191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37193 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37200 \begin_layout Subsection
37204 \begin_layout Standard
37205 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37206 \begin_inset space ~
37210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37212 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37219 \begin_layout Subsection
37223 \begin_layout Standard
37224 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37225 \begin_inset space ~
37229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37231 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37238 \begin_layout Subsection
37242 \begin_layout Standard
37243 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37244 title or caption of a float.
37245 Inserts a short title as described in section
37246 \begin_inset space ~
37250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37252 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37259 \begin_layout Subsection
37264 \begin_layout Standard
37265 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37266 Code box as described in section
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37273 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37280 \begin_layout Subsection
37282 \begin_inset Index idx
37285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37294 \begin_layout Standard
37295 Inserts a program listings box.
37296 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37298 Program Code Listings
37303 \begin_inset space ~
37311 \begin_layout Subsection
37315 \begin_layout Standard
37316 Inserts the actual date.
37317 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37321 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37329 \begin_inset space ~
37337 \begin_layout Subsection
37341 \begin_layout Standard
37342 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37343 \begin_inset space ~
37347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37349 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37356 \begin_layout Section
37358 \begin_inset Index idx
37361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37370 \begin_layout Standard
37371 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37375 of the current document.
37376 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37379 \begin_layout Subsection
37383 \begin_layout Standard
37384 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37385 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37386 to jump, for example, between section
37387 \begin_inset space ~
37391 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37392 \begin_inset space ~
37395 2.5 and use the submenu
37398 \begin_inset space ~
37402 \begin_inset space ~
37409 \begin_inset space ~
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37419 \begin_inset space ~
37425 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37429 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37435 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37438 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37441 \begin_layout Standard
37442 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37446 \begin_inset space ~
37451 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37454 \begin_inset space ~
37459 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37462 \begin_layout Subsection
37463 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37466 \begin_layout Standard
37467 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37471 \begin_layout Subsection
37475 \begin_layout Standard
37476 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37477 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37478 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37482 \begin_inset space ~
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37494 \begin_layout Subsection
37498 \begin_layout Standard
37499 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37502 The \SpecialChar LyX
37503 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37505 \begin_inset space ~
37513 \begin_inset space ~
37518 manual for a detailed description.
37521 \begin_layout Section
37523 \begin_inset Index idx
37526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37535 \begin_layout Subsection
37539 \begin_layout Standard
37540 Change Tracking is described in section
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37547 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37554 \begin_layout Subsection
37562 \begin_layout Standard
37563 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37564 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37565 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37567 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37568 to the clipboard or update the view.
37569 \begin_inset Newline newline
37572 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37576 \begin_layout Standard
37579 Open Containing Directory
37581 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37582 's temporary folder for the document.
37583 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37584 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37585 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37586 For example some journals require to send the
37590 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37594 \begin_layout Subsection
37595 Start Appendix Here
37598 \begin_layout Standard
37599 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37600 as described in section
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37607 reference "sec:Appendices"
37614 \begin_layout Subsection
37616 \begin_inset space ~
37622 \begin_layout Standard
37623 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37624 default output format for the document (menu
37626 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37627 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37628 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37630 \begin_inset space ~
37634 \begin_inset space ~
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37646 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
37650 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37653 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37654 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37656 \begin_inset space ~
37659 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37661 \begin_inset space ~
37664 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37666 \begin_inset space ~
37670 \begin_inset space ~
37676 \begin_inset space ~
37680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37682 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37686 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37687 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37689 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37690 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37692 \begin_inset space ~
37695 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37697 \begin_inset space ~
37700 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37704 \begin_inset space ~
37708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37710 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37715 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37716 when it is first configured.
37717 The default output format is
37720 \begin_inset space ~
37728 \begin_layout Subsection
37729 View (Other Formats)
37732 \begin_layout Standard
37733 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37734 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37735 actual document with an external program.
37736 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37737 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37738 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37740 All possible formats are listed in section
37741 \begin_inset space ~
37745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37747 reference "subsec:Export"
37752 You should at least see the menu entry
37757 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37759 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37761 \begin_inset space ~
37765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37767 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37772 \begin_inset Index idx
37775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37776 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37785 \begin_layout Standard
37786 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37787 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37789 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37790 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37792 \begin_inset space ~
37795 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37797 \begin_inset space ~
37800 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37810 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37815 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37816 when it is first configured.
37819 \begin_layout Subsection
37821 \begin_inset space ~
37827 \begin_layout Standard
37828 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37829 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37832 \begin_layout Subsection
37833 Update (Other Formats)
37836 \begin_layout Standard
37837 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37838 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37841 \begin_layout Subsection
37842 View Master Document
37845 \begin_layout Standard
37846 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37862 \begin_inset space ~
37867 manual for more information on this topic).
37868 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37869 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37873 \begin_inset space ~
37877 \begin_inset space ~
37882 generates the output of the whole book, while
37886 will just output the chapter alone.
37889 \begin_layout Standard
37890 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37891 in the document settings (menu
37893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37894 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37895 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37897 \begin_inset space ~
37901 \begin_inset space ~
37907 \begin_inset space ~
37911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37913 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
37917 ) or in the preferences (menu
37919 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37920 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37922 \begin_inset space ~
37925 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37927 \begin_inset space ~
37930 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37932 \begin_inset space ~
37936 \begin_inset space ~
37942 \begin_inset space ~
37946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37948 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37955 \begin_layout Subsection
37956 Update Master Document
37959 \begin_layout Standard
37960 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37976 \begin_inset space ~
37981 manual for more information on this topic).
37982 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37983 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37986 \begin_layout Standard
37987 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37988 in the document settings (menu
37990 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37991 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37992 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37994 \begin_inset space ~
37998 \begin_inset space ~
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38010 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
38014 ) or in the preferences (menu
38016 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38017 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38019 \begin_inset space ~
38022 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38024 \begin_inset space ~
38027 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38029 \begin_inset space ~
38033 \begin_inset space ~
38039 \begin_inset space ~
38043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38045 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38052 \begin_layout Subsection
38054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38056 name "subsec:Compressed"
38063 \begin_layout Standard
38064 Un/compresses the current document.
38065 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38066 compression (see the
38068 Additional Features
38070 manual for details).
38073 \begin_layout Subsection
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38078 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38081 \begin_layout Subsection
38085 \begin_layout Standard
38086 The document settings are described in appendix
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38093 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38100 \begin_layout Section
38102 \begin_inset Index idx
38105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38114 \begin_layout Subsection
38118 \begin_layout Standard
38119 Spell checking is explained in section
38120 \begin_inset space ~
38124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38126 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38133 \begin_layout Subsection
38137 \begin_layout Standard
38138 The thesaurus is described in section
38139 \begin_inset space ~
38143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38145 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38152 \begin_layout Subsection
38154 \begin_inset Index idx
38157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38164 \begin_inset Index idx
38167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38176 \begin_layout Standard
38177 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38178 the highlighted document part.
38181 \begin_layout Subsection
38187 \begin_inset Index idx
38190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38191 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38200 \begin_layout Standard
38201 Generates with the help of the program
38203 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38206 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38207 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38208 This feature is not available on Windows.
38211 \begin_layout Subsection
38217 \begin_inset Index idx
38220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38230 \begin_layout Standard
38231 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38236 \begin_inset space ~
38241 to see the full filename paths.
38244 \begin_layout Subsection
38246 \begin_inset Index idx
38249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38258 \begin_layout Standard
38259 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38260 files as described in section
38261 \begin_inset space ~
38265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38267 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38274 \begin_layout Subsection
38276 \begin_inset Index idx
38279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38292 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38310 \begin_inset Index idx
38313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38314 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38323 \begin_layout Standard
38324 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38325 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38326 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38327 -packages and programs it needs; see
38329 \begin_inset space ~
38333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38335 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38342 \begin_layout Subsection
38346 \begin_layout Standard
38351 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38352 \begin_inset space ~
38356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38358 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38365 \begin_layout Section
38367 \begin_inset Index idx
38370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38379 \begin_layout Standard
38380 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38381 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38383 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38387 \begin_layout Standard
38391 \begin_inset space ~
38396 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38397 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38398 packages and classes found
38399 by \SpecialChar LyX
38401 \begin_inset space ~
38405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38407 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38414 \begin_layout Standard
38418 \begin_inset space ~
38423 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38428 \begin_layout Section
38430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38432 name "sec:Toolbars"
38439 \begin_layout Standard
38440 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38441 \begin_inset space ~
38445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38447 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38454 \begin_layout Standard
38455 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38456 This is described in the
38458 Additional Features
38463 \begin_layout Subsection
38465 \begin_inset Index idx
38468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38477 \begin_layout Standard
38478 \begin_inset Graphics
38479 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38487 \begin_layout Standard
38488 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38494 \begin_layout Standard
38495 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38512 \begin_inset Note Note
38515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38516 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38521 manual for more information.
38529 \begin_layout Standard
38530 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38536 \begin_layout Standard
38537 \begin_inset Tabular
38538 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38539 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38540 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38541 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38547 \begin_inset Graphics
38548 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38562 pull-down box for the environments
38575 \begin_layout Standard
38576 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38582 \begin_layout Standard
38584 \begin_inset Tabular
38585 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38586 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38587 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38588 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38612 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38642 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38649 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38672 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38688 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38702 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 arg "spelling-continuously"
38726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38730 Spellcheck continuously
38736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38759 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38789 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38796 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38819 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38849 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38879 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38895 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38909 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38935 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38949 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38977 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38991 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38992 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39020 Emphasize text, function of the
39022 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39024 \begin_inset space ~
39027 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39057 Set text to noun style, function of the
39059 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39061 \begin_inset space ~
39064 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39073 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39082 arg "textstyle-apply"
39090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 Format text using the current settings in the
39096 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39098 \begin_inset space ~
39101 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39110 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39133 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39134 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39136 \begin_inset space ~
39145 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39154 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39182 arg "tabular-insert"
39190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39203 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39212 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39224 Toggle outline window on/off,
39226 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39242 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39254 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39269 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39281 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39294 \begin_layout Subsection
39296 \begin_inset Index idx
39299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39308 \begin_layout Standard
39309 \begin_inset Graphics
39310 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39318 \begin_layout Standard
39319 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39325 \begin_layout Standard
39326 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39330 \begin_layout Standard
39331 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39337 \begin_layout Standard
39338 \begin_inset Tabular
39339 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39340 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39341 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39342 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39370 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39379 arg "layout Enumerate"
39387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39406 arg "layout Itemize"
39414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39451 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39460 arg "layout Description"
39468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39487 arg "depth-increment"
39495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39501 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39503 \begin_inset space ~
39507 \begin_inset space ~
39516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39525 arg "depth-decrement"
39533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39541 \begin_inset space ~
39545 \begin_inset space ~
39554 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39563 arg "float-insert figure"
39571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39577 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39578 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39585 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39594 arg "float-insert table"
39602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39608 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39609 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39655 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39676 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39685 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39729 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39731 \begin_inset space ~
39740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39749 arg "nomencl-insert"
39757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39763 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39783 arg "footnote-insert"
39791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39797 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39813 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39829 \begin_inset space ~
39838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39862 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39864 \begin_inset space ~
39873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39882 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39958 \begin_inset space ~
39967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39976 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39991 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39998 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40007 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40022 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40024 \begin_inset space ~
40033 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40042 arg "dialog-show character"
40050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40056 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40058 \begin_inset space ~
40061 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40077 arg "layout-paragraph"
40085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40091 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40093 \begin_inset space ~
40102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40111 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40125 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40139 \begin_layout Subsection
40140 View/Update Toolbar
40141 \begin_inset Index idx
40144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40145 Toolbar ! View / Update
40153 \begin_layout Standard
40154 \begin_inset Graphics
40155 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40162 \begin_layout Standard
40163 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40169 \begin_layout Standard
40170 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40174 \begin_layout Standard
40175 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40181 \begin_layout Standard
40182 \begin_inset Tabular
40183 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40184 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40185 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40186 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40226 arg "buffer-update"
40234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40240 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40256 arg "master-buffer-view"
40264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40270 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40272 \begin_inset space ~
40281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40290 arg "master-buffer-update"
40298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40304 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40306 \begin_inset space ~
40310 \begin_inset space ~
40319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40328 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40342 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40343 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40344 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40345 Synchronize with Output
40351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40375 View (Other Formats)
40381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40388 arg "update-others"
40396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40402 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40403 Update (Other Formats)
40416 \begin_layout Standard
40417 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40421 \begin_layout Subsection
40425 \begin_layout Standard
40426 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40427 \begin_inset space ~
40431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40433 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40437 , the table toolbar
40438 \begin_inset Index idx
40441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40455 manual and the math macro toolbar
40456 \begin_inset Index idx
40459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40472 \begin_layout Chapter
40473 The Document Settings
40474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40476 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40481 \begin_inset Index idx
40484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40485 Document ! Settings
40493 \begin_layout Standard
40497 \begin_inset space ~
40502 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40503 is called with the menu
40505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40509 You can save your document settings as default with the
40511 Save as Document Defaults
40513 button in any dialog.
40514 This will create a template named
40518 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40519 when you create a new document without
40523 \begin_layout Standard
40528 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40529 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40532 \begin_layout Standard
40533 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40534 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40535 to find the one you are looking for.
40536 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40537 the submenus of the dialog.
40539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40543 \begin_inset space \space{}
40547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40554 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40555 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40556 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40559 \begin_layout Section
40563 \begin_layout Standard
40564 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40566 Document classes are described in section
40567 \begin_inset space ~
40571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40573 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40581 \begin_layout Standard
40585 \begin_inset space ~
40590 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40595 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40596 as a layout for a document class.
40597 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40599 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40608 \begin_layout Standard
40609 Some classes use special class options by default.
40610 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40614 and you can decide to use them or not.
40615 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40616 recommended you leave them untouched.
40621 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40622 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40627 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40629 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40635 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40636 \begin_inset Newline newline
40641 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40644 \begin_inset Newline newline
40647 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40648 distribution, see section
40653 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40655 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40667 \begin_layout Standard
40672 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40673 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40674 in the background if the child document
40675 is opened without its master.
40676 This way child documents are always compilable.
40677 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40684 \begin_inset space ~
40692 \begin_layout Standard
40693 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40704 \begin_inset Index idx
40707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40709 -packages ! prettyref
40715 \begin_inset Index idx
40718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40720 -packages ! refstyle
40725 for cross-references, see section
40726 \begin_inset space ~
40730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40732 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40739 \begin_layout Section
40743 \begin_layout Standard
40744 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40745 Please refer to the section
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40761 manual for details.
40764 \begin_layout Section
40768 \begin_layout Standard
40769 Modules are explained in section
40770 \begin_inset space ~
40774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40776 reference "subsec:Modules"
40783 \begin_layout Section
40787 \begin_layout Standard
40789 \begin_inset space ~
40793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40795 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40802 \begin_layout Section
40806 \begin_layout Standard
40807 The document font settings are described in section
40808 \begin_inset space ~
40812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40814 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40821 \begin_layout Section
40825 \begin_layout Standard
40826 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40843 and whether it should be a
40846 \begin_inset space ~
40851 can also be specified here.
40854 \begin_layout Standard
40855 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40856 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40857 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40859 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40862 \begin_layout Standard
40865 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40868 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40869 justifies the text on screen.
40870 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40874 \begin_layout Section
40878 \begin_layout Standard
40879 This dialog is described in sections
40880 \begin_inset space ~
40884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40886 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40893 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40900 \begin_layout Section
40904 \begin_layout Standard
40905 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40912 reference "subsec:Margins"
40919 \begin_layout Section
40921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40923 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40928 \begin_inset Index idx
40931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40932 Language ! Encoding
40940 \begin_layout Standard
40941 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40942 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40943 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40945 is always encoded in utf8).
40946 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40947 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40948 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40949 -command is not known for
40950 a particular character).
40953 \begin_layout Standard
40954 If you use the option
40959 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40960 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40961 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40963 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40964 exactly one encoding.
40965 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40968 \begin_layout Standard
40970 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40971 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40972 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40973 installation supports Unicode), choose
40974 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40975 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40976 is quite incomplete, so
40977 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40982 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40983 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40984 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40985 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40986 -commands is not used, because all
40987 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40988 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40989 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40990 , two new alternative engines
40991 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40993 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40995 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40998 \begin_inset space ~
41006 \begin_inset space ~
41014 \begin_inset space ~
41020 \begin_inset space ~
41024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41026 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41031 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41035 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41038 \begin_layout Standard
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41047 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41048 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41058 The possible settings are:
41061 \begin_layout Description
41062 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41064 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41065 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41075 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41082 \begin_layout Description
41083 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41084 format you will use.
41085 In many cases this will be
41090 \begin_inset Index idx
41093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41101 If the newer package
41106 \begin_inset Index idx
41109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41111 -packages ! polyglossia
41116 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41117 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41118 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41120 this package will be used instead of
41127 \begin_layout Description
41129 \begin_inset space ~
41140 would be more appropriate.
41143 \begin_layout Description
41144 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41145 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41149 (for German texts), type in
41152 \begin_inset Newline newline
41157 usepackage{ngerman}
41160 \begin_layout Description
41161 None will not use a language package.
41162 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41165 \begin_layout Standard
41166 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41169 \begin_layout Description
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41175 \begin_inset space ~
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41186 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41192 \begin_inset Index idx
41195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41197 -packages ! inputenc
41203 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41204 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41205 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41209 \begin_layout Description
41210 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41212 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41213 commands, which may result in a big
41214 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41215 -commands are needed.
41218 \begin_layout Description
41220 \begin_inset space ~
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41227 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41230 \begin_layout Description
41232 \begin_inset space ~
41236 \begin_inset space ~
41239 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41242 \begin_layout Description
41244 \begin_inset space ~
41247 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41250 \begin_layout Description
41252 \begin_inset space ~
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41259 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41260 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41263 \begin_layout Description
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41272 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41276 \begin_layout Description
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41285 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41286 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41289 \begin_layout Description
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41302 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41309 \begin_layout Description
41311 \begin_inset space ~
41315 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_inset space ~
41322 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41323 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41326 \begin_layout Description
41328 \begin_inset space ~
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41335 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41336 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41337 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41338 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41339 \begin_inset space ~
41343 \begin_inset space ~
41349 \begin_layout Description
41351 \begin_inset space ~
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41358 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41359 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41360 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41362 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41373 \begin_layout Description
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41382 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41385 \begin_layout Description
41387 \begin_inset space ~
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41394 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41397 \begin_layout Description
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41403 \begin_inset space ~
41406 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41409 \begin_layout Description
41411 \begin_inset space ~
41414 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41417 \begin_layout Description
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41422 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41425 \begin_layout Description
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41434 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41437 \begin_layout Description
41439 \begin_inset space ~
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41449 \begin_layout Description
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41458 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41461 \begin_layout Description
41463 \begin_inset space ~
41467 \begin_inset space ~
41473 \begin_layout Description
41475 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41482 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41488 \begin_inset Index idx
41491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41498 , when using this, set the document language to
41503 \begin_layout Description
41505 \begin_inset space ~
41509 \begin_inset space ~
41512 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41517 , when using this, set the document language to
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41526 \begin_layout Description
41528 \begin_inset space ~
41532 \begin_inset space ~
41535 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41541 \begin_inset Index idx
41544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41546 -packages ! japanese
41551 , when using this, set the document language to
41556 \begin_layout Description
41558 \begin_inset space ~
41562 \begin_inset space ~
41565 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41570 , when using this, set the document language to
41575 \begin_layout Description
41577 \begin_inset space ~
41581 \begin_inset space ~
41584 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41589 , when using this, set the document language to
41594 \begin_layout Description
41596 \begin_inset space ~
41599 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41602 \begin_layout Description
41604 \begin_inset space ~
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41612 \begin_inset space ~
41615 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41618 \begin_layout Description
41620 \begin_inset space ~
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41628 \begin_inset space ~
41631 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41632 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41633 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41636 \begin_layout Description
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_inset space ~
41648 \begin_layout Description
41650 \begin_inset space ~
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41657 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41658 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41661 \begin_layout Description
41663 \begin_inset space ~
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41670 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41676 \begin_inset Index idx
41679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41686 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41689 \begin_layout Description
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41699 \begin_inset space ~
41702 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41709 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41712 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41719 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41720 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41722 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41725 \begin_layout Description
41727 \begin_inset space ~
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41734 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41740 \begin_inset Index idx
41743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41750 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41753 \begin_layout Description
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41758 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41764 \begin_inset Index idx
41767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41769 -packages ! inputenc
41775 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41779 \begin_layout Description
41781 \begin_inset space ~
41785 \begin_inset space ~
41789 \begin_inset space ~
41792 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41793 \begin_inset space ~
41799 \begin_layout Description
41801 \begin_inset space ~
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41812 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41813 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41814 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41818 \begin_layout Description
41820 \begin_inset space ~
41824 \begin_inset space ~
41828 \begin_inset space ~
41831 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41832 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41835 \begin_layout Section
41837 \begin_inset Index idx
41840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41847 \begin_inset Index idx
41850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41857 \begin_inset Index idx
41860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41861 Color ! Shaded boxes
41867 \begin_inset Index idx
41870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41871 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41879 \begin_layout Standard
41880 Here you can alter the font color for the
41884 (default: black), for
41887 \begin_inset space ~
41892 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41896 (default: white) and for
41899 \begin_inset space ~
41909 sets the color back to the default.
41912 \begin_layout Standard
41913 Clicking any button showing
41921 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41922 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41923 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41924 later more quickly.
41927 \begin_layout Standard
41928 Note, if you change the
41931 \begin_inset space ~
41936 font color and use the option
41939 \begin_inset space ~
41944 in the document settings under
41947 \begin_inset space ~
41952 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41953 \begin_inset space ~
41957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41959 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41966 \begin_layout Standard
41967 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41973 \begin_layout Standard
41977 \begin_inset space ~
41986 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41989 \begin_inset space ~
41992 Code after a forced page break:
41995 \begin_layout Itemize
41996 For the page color:
41997 \begin_inset Newline newline
42004 pagecolor{color name}
42007 \begin_layout Itemize
42008 For the text color:
42009 \begin_inset Newline newline
42019 \begin_layout Standard
42020 You are restricted to one of
42056 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42063 \begin_inset space ~
42069 \begin_inset Newline newline
42072 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42073 names to refer to them:
42076 \begin_layout Itemize
42082 \begin_inset Newline newline
42087 page_backgroundcolor
42090 \begin_layout Itemize
42094 \begin_inset space ~
42100 \begin_inset Newline newline
42108 \begin_layout Itemize
42112 \begin_inset space ~
42118 \begin_inset Newline newline
42126 \begin_layout Itemize
42130 \begin_inset space ~
42136 \begin_inset Newline newline
42144 \begin_layout Standard
42145 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42148 \begin_inset space ~
42156 \begin_inset space ~
42164 \begin_layout Section
42168 \begin_layout Standard
42169 Here you can adjust the
42173 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42177 as described in section
42178 \begin_inset space ~
42182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42184 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42191 \begin_layout Section
42195 \begin_layout Standard
42196 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42202 \begin_inset Index idx
42205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42217 \begin_inset Index idx
42220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42222 -packages ! jurabib
42230 Sectioned bibliography
42232 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42238 \begin_inset Index idx
42241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42243 -packages ! bibtopic
42248 and you can select a
42252 for the generation of the bibliography.
42253 For a further description see section
42254 \begin_inset space ~
42258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42260 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42267 \begin_layout Section
42271 \begin_layout Standard
42272 Here you can define the
42276 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42278 \begin_inset space ~
42282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42284 reference "sec:Index"
42291 \begin_layout Section
42295 \begin_layout Standard
42296 The PDF properties are explained in section
42297 \begin_inset space ~
42301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42303 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42310 \begin_layout Section
42314 \begin_layout Standard
42315 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42316 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42322 \begin_inset Index idx
42325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42327 -packages ! amsmath
42337 \begin_inset Index idx
42340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42342 -packages ! amssymb
42352 \begin_inset Index idx
42355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42367 \begin_inset Index idx
42370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42382 \begin_inset Index idx
42385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42387 -packages ! mathdots
42397 \begin_inset Index idx
42400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42402 -packages ! mathtools
42412 \begin_inset Index idx
42415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42427 \begin_inset Index idx
42430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42432 -packages ! stackrel
42442 \begin_inset Index idx
42445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42447 -packages ! stmaryrd
42457 \begin_inset Index idx
42460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42462 -packages ! undertilde
42467 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42470 \begin_layout Description
42471 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42472 -errors in formulas,
42473 ensure that you have this enabled.
42476 \begin_layout Description
42477 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42478 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42479 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42483 \begin_layout Description
42484 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42487 \begin_inset space ~
42499 \begin_layout Description
42500 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42503 \begin_inset space ~
42515 \begin_layout Description
42516 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42527 \begin_layout Description
42528 mathtools is used for the math commands
42564 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42571 \begin_layout Description
42572 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42574 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42583 \begin_layout Description
42584 stackrel is used for the math command
42601 \begin_layout Description
42602 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42605 \begin_layout Description
42606 undertilde is used for the math command
42614 Accents for one Character
42623 \begin_layout Section
42627 \begin_layout Standard
42628 The float placement options are described in the section
42631 \begin_inset space ~
42639 \begin_inset space ~
42647 \begin_layout Section
42651 \begin_layout Standard
42652 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42654 Program Code Listings
42659 \begin_inset space ~
42667 \begin_layout Section
42671 \begin_layout Standard
42672 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42680 set to be used and set the
42685 The itemize environment is described in section
42686 \begin_inset space ~
42690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42692 reference "sec:Itemize"
42699 \begin_layout Standard
42700 You can furthermore specify a
42703 \begin_inset space ~
42708 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42709 command of the desired character.
42710 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42717 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42723 \begin_inset space \space{}
42727 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42737 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42738 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42741 \begin_layout Standard
42742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42750 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42751 -packages in the preamble (menu
42754 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42755 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42758 \begin_inset space ~
42764 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42768 usepackage{textcomp}
42771 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42775 usepackage{amssymb}
42785 \begin_layout Section
42789 \begin_layout Standard
42790 Branches are described in section
42791 \begin_inset space ~
42795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42797 reference "sec:Branches"
42804 \begin_layout Section
42806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42808 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
42815 \begin_layout Standard
42816 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42819 \begin_layout Description
42821 \begin_inset space ~
42825 \begin_inset space ~
42828 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42848 View Master Document
42849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42856 Update Master Document
42857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42864 menu or the toolbar.
42865 The default is set in
42867 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42868 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42870 \begin_inset space ~
42873 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42877 \begin_inset space ~
42881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42883 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42890 \begin_layout Description
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42896 \begin_inset space ~
42899 Output settings for the menu
42901 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42909 For a detailed description see section
42911 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42916 \begin_inset space ~
42924 \begin_layout Description
42926 \begin_inset space ~
42930 \begin_inset space ~
42933 Options offers settings for the export format
42941 \begin_inset space ~
42946 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42947 \begin_inset space ~
42950 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42954 \begin_inset space ~
42959 settings are described in detail in section
42961 Math Output in XHTML
42966 \begin_inset space ~
42975 \begin_inset space ~
42979 \begin_inset space ~
42984 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42987 \begin_layout Description
42989 \begin_inset space ~
42994 Save transient properties
42996 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
42997 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
42998 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
43002 \begin_layout Itemize
43003 the activation of change tracking
43006 \begin_layout Itemize
43007 the output of tracked changes
43010 \begin_layout Itemize
43011 the recording of the document directory path.
43014 \begin_layout Standard
43015 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
43016 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
43020 \begin_layout Section
43028 \begin_layout Standard
43029 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43031 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43033 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43035 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43039 \begin_layout Standard
43040 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43041 -syntax is given in section
43042 \begin_inset space ~
43046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43048 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43055 \begin_layout Chapter
43061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43063 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43068 \begin_inset Index idx
43071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43080 \begin_layout Standard
43081 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43083 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43087 It has the following submenus.
43090 \begin_layout Section
43094 \begin_layout Subsection
43098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43099 User Interface File
43100 \begin_inset Index idx
43103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43104 Customization ! of toolbars
43110 \begin_inset Index idx
43113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43114 Customization ! of menus
43122 \begin_layout Standard
43123 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43124 interface (ui) file.
43125 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43133 \begin_layout Description
43138 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43141 \begin_layout Description
43148 the menu entries in popup context menus
43151 \begin_layout Description
43156 specifies the toolbar buttons
43159 \begin_layout Standard
43160 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43161 and edit the entries.
43164 \begin_layout Standard
43165 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43177 entries must be finished with an explicit
43202 and in the case of the
43203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43215 The syntax for the entries is:
43218 \begin_layout Standard
43219 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43248 \begin_layout Standard
43250 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43253 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43254 -functions are listed in the menu
43256 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43258 \begin_inset space ~
43266 \begin_layout Standard
43267 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43273 \begin_layout Standard
43274 For example, assuming you use the menu
43276 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43279 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43283 \begin_layout Standard
43284 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43308 \begin_layout Standard
43310 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43325 to have the sixth bookmark.
43328 \begin_layout Standard
43332 \begin_inset space ~
43337 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43338 's toolbar buttons.
43339 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43343 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43354 \begin_layout Standard
43357 Enable tool tips in main work area
43359 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43367 \begin_layout Standard
43372 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43373 should display in the menu
43375 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43377 \begin_inset space ~
43385 \begin_layout Subsection
43389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43393 \begin_layout Standard
43396 Restore window layouts and geometries
43399 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43400 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43404 \begin_layout Standard
43407 Restore cursor positions
43409 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43413 \begin_layout Standard
43416 Load opened files from last session
43418 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43422 \begin_layout Standard
43425 Clear all session information
43427 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43428 sessions (cursor positions, names
43429 of last opened documents, etc.).
43432 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43436 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43441 \begin_inset Index idx
43444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43453 \begin_layout Standard
43456 Backup original documents when saving
43458 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43459 it was saved the last time.
43460 It is stored in the
43463 \begin_inset space ~
43469 \begin_inset space ~
43473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43475 reference "sec:Paths"
43479 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43482 \begin_inset space ~
43488 The backup file has the file extension
43489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43503 \begin_layout Standard
43506 Backup documents, every
43508 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43511 \begin_layout Standard
43514 Save documents compressed by default
43516 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43517 \begin_inset space ~
43521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43523 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43528 This applies to newly created documents only.
43529 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43532 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43533 Windows & work area
43536 \begin_layout Standard
43539 Open documents in tabs
43541 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43545 \begin_layout Standard
43550 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43557 \begin_inset space ~
43561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43563 reference "sec:Paths"
43567 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43574 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43575 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43576 of \SpecialChar LyX
43578 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43579 instance is created for each file.
43582 \begin_layout Standard
43585 Single close-tab button
43587 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43597 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43598 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43601 \begin_layout Standard
43602 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43610 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43611 before the change takes effect.
43619 \begin_layout Standard
43624 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43626 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43628 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43632 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43633 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43634 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43637 \begin_layout Subsection
43639 \begin_inset Index idx
43642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43651 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43658 \begin_layout Standard
43659 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43663 \begin_layout Standard
43664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43672 This section only deals with the fonts
43676 the \SpecialChar LyX
43678 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43681 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43682 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43693 \begin_layout Standard
43694 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43711 (depends on the system) as its
43714 \begin_inset space ~
43730 \begin_layout Standard
43731 You can change the font size with the
43738 \begin_layout Standard
43743 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43748 points have the size of 1
43749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43753 \begin_inset space ~
43757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43759 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43764 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43769 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43770 \begin_inset space ~
43774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43776 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43783 \begin_layout Standard
43786 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43788 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43789 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43790 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43791 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43792 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43794 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43801 \begin_layout Subsection
43803 \begin_inset Index idx
43806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43807 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43814 \begin_inset Index idx
43817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43826 \begin_layout Standard
43827 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43828 by choosing an item in the
43829 list and selecting the
43836 \begin_layout Standard
43837 By checking the option
43841 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43844 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43845 \begin_inset space ~
43849 \begin_inset space ~
43854 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43857 \begin_layout Subsection
43859 \begin_inset Index idx
43862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43871 \begin_layout Standard
43872 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43876 \begin_layout Standard
43881 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43882 This feature is described in section
43883 \begin_inset space ~
43887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43889 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43896 \begin_layout Standard
43897 Checking the option
43900 \begin_inset space ~
43904 \begin_inset space ~
43908 \begin_inset space ~
43913 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43916 \begin_layout Section
43918 \begin_inset Index idx
43921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43930 \begin_layout Subsection
43934 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43938 \begin_layout Standard
43941 Cursor follows scrollbar
43943 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43947 \begin_layout Standard
43948 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43949 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43950 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43953 \begin_layout Standard
43956 Scroll below end of document
43958 is self-explanatory.
43961 \begin_layout Standard
43962 In \SpecialChar LyX
43963 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43970 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43972 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43973 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43976 \begin_layout Standard
43979 Sort environments alphabetically
43981 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43984 \begin_layout Standard
43987 Group environments by their category
43989 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43992 \begin_layout Standard
43997 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44012 \begin_layout Standard
44013 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44018 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44019 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44023 \begin_layout Subsection
44025 \begin_inset Index idx
44028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44035 \begin_inset Index idx
44038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44039 Settings ! Shortcuts
44047 \begin_layout Standard
44052 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44054 Several binding files are available, among them:
44057 \begin_layout Description
44058 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44061 \begin_layout Description
44062 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44074 \begin_layout Description
44075 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44086 \begin_layout Standard
44087 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44092 , and binding files for special languages.
44093 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44098 \begin_inset space \space{}
44102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44110 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44111 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44112 will try to use the appropriate binding
44116 \begin_layout Standard
44117 Some binding files, like
44121 , only have a limited scope.
44122 When looking at the end of the file
44126 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44129 \begin_layout Standard
44133 \begin_inset space ~
44137 \begin_inset space ~
44142 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44143 in the selected key binding file.
44146 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44150 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44155 \begin_inset Index idx
44158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44159 Key Bindings ! Editing
44167 \begin_layout Standard
44168 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44169 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44170 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44171 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44174 Show key-bindings containing
44177 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44178 Insert there for example as keyword
44179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44186 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44187 functions that contain
44188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44196 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44197 All \SpecialChar LyX
44198 functions are also listed in the file
44203 that you will find in the
44210 \begin_layout Standard
44211 For example, to add the shortcut
44219 , select the function and press the
44224 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44225 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44228 \begin_layout Standard
44229 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44230 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44232 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44233 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44235 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44240 \begin_layout Standard
44241 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44244 \begin_layout Standard
44245 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44247 The syntax of the entries is:
44250 \begin_layout Standard
44256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44275 \begin_layout Subsection
44277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44279 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44284 \begin_inset Index idx
44287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44294 \begin_inset Index idx
44297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44298 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44306 \begin_layout Standard
44307 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44308 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44309 provides keyboard maps.
44310 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44311 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44314 \begin_inset space ~
44318 \begin_inset space ~
44323 and select the keyboard map file named
44330 \begin_layout Standard
44339 keyboard map and, if you use the
44343 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44346 arg "keymap-primary"
44352 arg "keymap-secondary"
44355 respectively or toggle between them with
44358 arg "keymap-toggle"
44364 \begin_layout Standard
44365 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44373 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44382 \begin_layout Standard
44383 You can also specify the mouse
44385 Wheel scrolling speed
44388 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44392 Middle mouse button pasting
44394 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44395 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44398 \begin_layout Standard
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44410 \begin_inset space ~
44415 you can select a key for zooming.
44416 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44419 \begin_layout Subsection
44423 \begin_layout Standard
44424 Input completion is described in section
44425 \begin_inset space ~
44429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44431 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44438 \begin_layout Section
44440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44447 \begin_inset Index idx
44450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44457 \begin_inset Index idx
44460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44469 \begin_layout Standard
44470 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44471 are normally determined during
44473 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44476 \begin_layout Description
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44481 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44482 's working directory.
44483 It is the default when you
44494 \begin_inset space ~
44502 \begin_layout Description
44504 \begin_inset space ~
44507 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44509 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44511 \begin_inset space ~
44515 \begin_inset space ~
44523 \begin_layout Description
44525 \begin_inset space ~
44528 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44534 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44538 \begin_inset Newline newline
44542 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44554 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44555 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44563 \begin_layout Description
44565 \begin_inset space ~
44569 \begin_inset Index idx
44572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44578 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44579 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44580 \begin_inset space ~
44584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44586 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44594 will be used to save the backups.
44595 \begin_inset Newline newline
44598 Backup files have the ending
44599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44609 \begin_layout Description
44611 \begin_inset space ~
44614 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44615 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44617 \begin_inset Newline newline
44624 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44630 You can edit this file with the program
44639 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44640 in its preferences under
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44649 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44654 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44656 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44657 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44663 and \SpecialChar LyX
44664 need to be running the same time.
44665 \begin_inset Newline newline
44668 The pipe is also used for the
44672 feature, see section
44673 \begin_inset space ~
44677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44679 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44684 \begin_inset Newline newline
44687 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44688 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44689 \begin_inset Newline newline
44705 \begin_layout Description
44707 \begin_inset space ~
44710 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44713 \begin_layout Description
44715 \begin_inset space ~
44718 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44719 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44720 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44723 \begin_layout Description
44725 \begin_inset space ~
44728 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44734 You only need to specify it if you are using
44738 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44740 For \SpecialChar LyX
44745 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44749 \begin_layout Description
44751 \begin_inset space ~
44754 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44755 When \SpecialChar LyX
44756 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44757 to find it on the system.
44758 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44760 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44769 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44770 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44773 \begin_layout Description
44775 \begin_inset space ~
44778 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44779 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44780 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44781 code or in the document
44783 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44785 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44786 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44787 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44788 scanned for the input files.
44789 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44790 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44792 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44793 compilation may fail for some documents.
44796 \begin_layout Section
44800 \begin_layout Standard
44801 Here you can insert your
44810 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44812 \begin_inset space ~
44816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44818 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44822 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44825 \begin_layout Section
44827 \begin_inset Index idx
44830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44831 Language ! Settings
44837 \begin_inset Index idx
44840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44841 Settings ! Language
44849 \begin_layout Subsection
44851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44853 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44860 \begin_layout Description
44862 \begin_inset space ~
44866 \begin_inset space ~
44869 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44871 You can find its actual translation status here:
44872 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44874 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44881 \begin_layout Description
44883 \begin_inset space ~
44886 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44887 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44888 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44889 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44906 The most widespread language package is
44911 \begin_inset Index idx
44914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44921 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44923 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44924 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44925 come with the alternative
44931 \begin_inset Index idx
44934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 -packages ! polyglossia
44941 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44942 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44948 The available selections are described in section
44949 \begin_inset space ~
44953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44955 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44962 \begin_layout Description
44964 \begin_inset space ~
44967 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44968 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44969 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44970 An example is the start command
44976 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44978 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44982 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44997 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45002 \begin_layout Description
45004 \begin_inset space ~
45012 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45013 command toggles the package on and off.
45016 \begin_layout Description
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45022 \begin_inset space ~
45025 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45029 \begin_layout Description
45031 \begin_inset space ~
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45038 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45042 \begin_layout Description
45044 \begin_inset space ~
45048 \begin_inset space ~
45051 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45052 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45053 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45055 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45062 \begin_layout Description
45064 \begin_inset space ~
45067 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45069 When this option is not set, the
45072 \begin_inset space ~
45077 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45079 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45082 \begin_inset space ~
45090 \begin_layout Description
45092 \begin_inset space ~
45098 \begin_inset space ~
45104 When it is not set, the
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45112 is set to the end of the document.
45115 \begin_layout Description
45117 \begin_inset space ~
45121 \begin_inset space ~
45124 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45125 language will be underlined in blue.
45128 \begin_layout Description
45130 \begin_inset space ~
45134 \begin_inset space ~
45137 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45138 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45141 \begin_layout Description
45143 \begin_inset space ~
45146 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45147 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45148 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45149 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45152 \begin_layout Subsection
45156 \begin_layout Standard
45157 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45158 \begin_inset space ~
45162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45164 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45171 \begin_layout Section
45175 \begin_layout Subsection
45177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45179 name "subsec:General-output"
45186 \begin_layout Description
45188 \begin_inset space ~
45191 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45193 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45201 For a detailed description see section
45203 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45208 \begin_inset space ~
45216 \begin_layout Description
45218 \begin_inset space ~
45221 Options Options for the program
45225 that is used for the export format
45230 \begin_inset space ~
45234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45236 reference "subsec:Export"
45241 Possible options are listed in the
45246 \begin_inset Newline newline
45250 \begin_inset Flex URL
45253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45255 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45265 \begin_layout Description
45267 \begin_inset space ~
45271 \begin_inset space ~
45274 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45277 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45278 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45280 \begin_inset space ~
45286 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45289 \begin_layout Description
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_inset Index idx
45298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45305 \begin_inset Index idx
45308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45309 Settings ! Date format
45314 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45315 \begin_inset Newline newline
45319 \begin_inset Flex URL
45322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45324 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45330 \begin_inset Newline newline
45333 For example the format
45334 \begin_inset Newline newline
45338 \begin_inset Newline newline
45341 prints the date as day/month/year.
45344 \begin_layout Description
45346 \begin_inset space ~
45350 \begin_inset space ~
45353 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45354 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45357 \begin_layout Subsection
45363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45365 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45370 \begin_inset Index idx
45373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45374 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45383 \begin_layout Description
45385 \begin_inset space ~
45393 \begin_inset space ~
45397 \begin_inset space ~
45400 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45405 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45426 are used for Cyrillic.
45427 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45440 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45442 sets up in the background.
45443 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45446 \begin_layout Description
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45452 \begin_inset space ~
45456 \begin_inset space ~
45460 \begin_inset space ~
45463 options They only have an effect when the program
45467 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45470 \begin_layout Standard
45471 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45472 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45473 manuals of the applications.
45476 \begin_layout Description
45478 \begin_inset space ~
45481 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45482 \begin_inset space ~
45486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45488 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45495 \begin_layout Description
45497 \begin_inset space ~
45500 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45501 \begin_inset space ~
45505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45507 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45514 \begin_layout Description
45516 \begin_inset space ~
45519 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45520 \begin_inset space ~
45524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45526 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45533 \begin_layout Description
45539 \begin_inset space ~
45542 command Command for the program
45544 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45547 that is described in the section
45549 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45554 Additional Features
45559 \begin_layout Standard
45560 There are additionally the following options:
45563 \begin_layout Description
45565 \begin_inset space ~
45569 \begin_inset space ~
45573 \begin_inset space ~
45577 \begin_inset space ~
45582 \begin_inset space ~
45585 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45603 to separate folders.
45604 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45606 \begin_inset Index idx
45609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45616 \begin_inset Index idx
45619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45628 \begin_layout Description
45630 \begin_inset space ~
45634 \begin_inset space ~
45638 \begin_inset space ~
45642 \begin_inset space ~
45646 \begin_inset space ~
45650 \begin_inset space ~
45653 changes Removes all manually set
45659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45660 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45662 \begin_inset space ~
45667 dialog when changing the document class.
45670 \begin_layout Section
45672 \begin_inset space ~
45676 \begin_inset Index idx
45679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45688 \begin_layout Subsection
45690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45692 name "subsec:Converters"
45697 \begin_inset Index idx
45700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45709 \begin_layout Standard
45710 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45711 from one format to another.
45712 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45713 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45720 \begin_inset space ~
45725 field and press the
45730 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45734 \begin_inset space ~
45739 drop-down list, modify the
45743 field and press the
45750 \begin_layout Standard
45753 Converter File Cache
45759 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45761 Maximum Age (in days
45764 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45765 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45768 \begin_layout Standard
45769 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45770 definition, is described in the section
45781 \begin_layout Subsection
45783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45785 name "sec:File-Formats"
45790 \begin_inset Index idx
45793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45800 \begin_inset Index idx
45803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45812 \begin_layout Standard
45813 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45823 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45826 \begin_layout Standard
45827 You can also define the
45829 Default output format
45831 that is used when you use
45833 View, Update, View Master Document
45837 Update Master Document
45843 menu or the toolbar.
45846 \begin_layout Standard
45847 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45858 \begin_layout Standard
45859 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45861 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45862 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45863 This is done by specifying a
45868 More about this is described in the section
45879 \begin_layout Chapter
45880 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45882 \begin_inset Index idx
45885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45894 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45901 \begin_layout Standard
45903 \begin_inset space ~
45907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45909 reference "tab:Units"
45913 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45914 and used in this documentation.
45917 \begin_layout Standard
45918 \begin_inset Float table
45924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45925 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45951 \begin_inset Tabular
45952 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45953 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45954 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45955 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46162 scaled point (65536
46163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46241 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46314 % of original image width
46319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46630 \begin_layout Chapter
46632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46634 name "chap:Credits"
46641 \begin_layout Standard
46642 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46643 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46646 \begin_layout Itemize
46649 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46652 \begin_layout Itemize
46658 \begin_layout Itemize
46664 \begin_layout Itemize
46670 \begin_layout Itemize
46676 \begin_layout Itemize
46682 \begin_layout Itemize
46688 \begin_layout Itemize
46694 \begin_layout Itemize
46697 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46700 \begin_layout Itemize
46706 \begin_layout Itemize
46712 \begin_layout Itemize
46718 \begin_layout Itemize
46724 \begin_layout Itemize
46730 \begin_layout Itemize
46736 \begin_layout Itemize
46742 \begin_layout Itemize
46748 \begin_layout Itemize
46749 The \SpecialChar LyX
46751 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46760 \begin_layout Standard
46761 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46764 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46771 \begin_layout Bibliography
46772 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46773 LatexCommand bibitem
46779 The \SpecialChar LyX
46781 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46784 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46789 \begin_inset Newline newline
46793 \begin_inset Flex URL
46796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46798 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46806 \begin_layout Bibliography
46807 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46808 LatexCommand bibitem
46809 key "latexcompanion"
46813 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46815 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46816 Companion Second Edition.
46819 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46822 \begin_layout Bibliography
46823 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46824 LatexCommand bibitem
46829 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46832 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46836 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46839 \begin_layout Bibliography
46840 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46841 LatexCommand bibitem
46849 : A Document Preparation System.
46852 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46855 \begin_layout Bibliography
46856 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46857 LatexCommand bibitem
46866 The \SpecialChar TeX
46870 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46873 \begin_layout Bibliography
46874 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46875 LatexCommand bibitem
46880 The \SpecialChar TeX
46882 \begin_inset Newline newline
46886 \begin_inset Flex URL
46889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46891 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46899 \begin_layout Bibliography
46900 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46901 LatexCommand bibitem
46906 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46908 \begin_inset Newline newline
46912 \begin_inset Flex URL
46915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46917 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46925 \begin_layout Bibliography
46926 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46927 LatexCommand bibitem
46933 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46935 name "Documentation"
46936 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46942 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46946 \begin_inset Newline newline
46950 \begin_inset Flex URL
46953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46955 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46963 \begin_layout Bibliography
46964 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46965 LatexCommand bibitem
46971 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46973 name "Documentation"
46974 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46978 how to use the program
46980 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46984 \begin_inset Newline newline
46988 \begin_inset Flex URL
46991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46993 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47001 \begin_layout Bibliography
47002 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47003 LatexCommand bibitem
47009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47011 name "Documentation"
47012 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47021 \begin_inset Newline newline
47025 \begin_inset Flex URL
47028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47030 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47038 \begin_layout Bibliography
47039 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47040 LatexCommand bibitem
47041 key "makeindex-man"
47046 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47049 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
47058 \begin_inset Newline newline
47062 \begin_inset Flex URL
47065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47067 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47075 \begin_layout Bibliography
47076 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47077 LatexCommand bibitem
47083 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47085 name "Documentation"
47086 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47095 \begin_inset Newline newline
47099 \begin_inset Flex URL
47102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47104 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47112 \begin_layout Bibliography
47113 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47114 LatexCommand bibitem
47120 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47122 name "Documentation"
47123 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47127 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47129 \begin_inset Newline newline
47133 \begin_inset Flex URL
47136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47138 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47146 \begin_layout Bibliography
47147 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47148 LatexCommand bibitem
47154 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47156 name "Documentation"
47157 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47161 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47167 \begin_inset Index idx
47170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47172 -packages ! caption
47178 \begin_inset Newline newline
47182 \begin_inset Flex URL
47185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47187 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47195 \begin_layout Bibliography
47196 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47197 LatexCommand bibitem
47203 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47205 name "Documentation"
47206 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47210 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47216 \begin_inset Index idx
47219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47221 -packages ! enumitem
47227 \begin_inset Newline newline
47231 \begin_inset Flex URL
47234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47236 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47244 \begin_layout Bibliography
47245 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47246 LatexCommand bibitem
47252 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47254 name "Documentation"
47255 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47259 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47265 \begin_inset Index idx
47268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47270 -packages ! fancyhdr
47276 \begin_inset Newline newline
47280 \begin_inset Flex URL
47283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47285 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47293 \begin_layout Bibliography
47294 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47295 LatexCommand bibitem
47301 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47303 name "Documentation"
47304 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47308 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47314 \begin_inset Index idx
47317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47319 -packages ! hyperref
47325 \begin_inset Newline newline
47329 \begin_inset Flex URL
47332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47334 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47342 \begin_layout Bibliography
47343 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47344 LatexCommand bibitem
47350 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47352 name "Documentation"
47353 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47357 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47363 \begin_inset Index idx
47366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47368 -packages ! nomencl
47374 \begin_inset Newline newline
47378 \begin_inset Flex URL
47381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47383 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47391 \begin_layout Bibliography
47392 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47393 LatexCommand bibitem
47399 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47401 name "Documentation"
47402 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47406 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47412 \begin_inset Index idx
47415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47417 -packages ! prettyref
47423 \begin_inset Newline newline
47427 \begin_inset Flex URL
47430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47432 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47440 \begin_layout Bibliography
47441 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47442 LatexCommand bibitem
47448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47450 name "Documentation"
47451 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47455 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47461 \begin_inset Index idx
47464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47466 -packages ! refstyle
47472 \begin_inset Newline newline
47476 \begin_inset Flex URL
47479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47481 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47489 \begin_layout Bibliography
47490 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47491 LatexCommand bibitem
47497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47500 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47504 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47506 \begin_inset Newline newline
47510 \begin_inset Flex URL
47513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47515 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47523 \begin_layout Bibliography
47524 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47525 LatexCommand bibitem
47531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47534 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47538 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47540 \begin_inset Newline newline
47544 \begin_inset Flex URL
47547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47549 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47557 \begin_layout Bibliography
47558 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47559 LatexCommand bibitem
47565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47568 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47572 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47573 for Cyrillic languages:
47574 \begin_inset Newline newline
47578 \begin_inset Flex URL
47581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47583 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47591 \begin_layout Bibliography
47592 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47593 LatexCommand bibitem
47599 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47602 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47606 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47608 \begin_inset Newline newline
47612 \begin_inset Flex URL
47615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47617 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47625 \begin_layout Bibliography
47626 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47627 LatexCommand bibitem
47633 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47636 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47640 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47642 \begin_inset Newline newline
47646 \begin_inset Flex URL
47649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47651 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47659 \begin_layout Bibliography
47660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47661 LatexCommand bibitem
47667 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47670 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47674 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47676 \begin_inset Newline newline
47680 \begin_inset Flex URL
47683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47685 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47693 \begin_layout Bibliography
47694 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47695 LatexCommand bibitem
47701 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47704 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47708 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47710 \begin_inset Newline newline
47714 \begin_inset Flex URL
47717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47719 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47727 \begin_layout Bibliography
47728 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47729 LatexCommand bibitem
47735 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47738 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47742 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47744 \begin_inset Newline newline
47748 \begin_inset Flex URL
47751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47753 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47761 \begin_layout Bibliography
47762 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47763 LatexCommand bibitem
47769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47772 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47776 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47778 \begin_inset Newline newline
47782 \begin_inset Flex URL
47785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47787 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47795 \begin_layout Bibliography
47796 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47797 LatexCommand bibitem
47803 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47806 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47810 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47812 \begin_inset Newline newline
47816 \begin_inset Flex URL
47819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47821 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47829 \begin_layout Bibliography
47830 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47831 LatexCommand bibitem
47837 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47840 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47844 about new features in
47850 \begin_inset Newline newline
47854 \begin_inset Flex URL
47857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47859 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47867 \begin_layout Standard
47868 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47902 \begin_inset Note Note
47905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47912 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47913 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47914 bibliography is the second one:
47922 \begin_layout Standard
47923 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47924 LatexCommand bibtex
47925 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47926 options "biblio/alphadin"
47933 \begin_layout Standard
47934 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47938 \begin_layout Standard
47939 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47940 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47946 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47947 LatexCommand printindex